Home

Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2.4 User`s Guide

1. add Eat ener 5 Click Add The Add Edit HBA window is displayed Add Edit HBA SUN StorEdge 3000 Family System SUN StorEdge SN 8009328 Host Name HBA Info Adapter Name pc1 1 f2000iNI FCE 1 WAAN 200000E069E01 2B6 ok Cancel Help 6 Enter the new Adapter Name and the appropriate WWN and click OK For details on determining the WWN see Determining Host Worldwide Names Fibre Channel and SATA Only on page 239 7 Click OK to close the Add Edit Host window 8 Under Available Hosts select the host and click Add to move the host back to the Connected Hosts list 9 Click OK to close the Configure Host WWN window A confirmation message is displayed 70 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 10 Click Close When you return to the LUN Filter view the new HBA device is gray It is available for LUN filtering Sun StorEdge TM Configuration Service File View Configuration Array Administration Help rare ls Main View Filter View Hosts Storage Pools Ld 206 235 238 67 falcon SunOS 5 8 mm SUN StorEdge SN 3328237 Managed by Host falcon I z Logical Drive 0 Partition 0 174000 MB Logical Drive 0 Partition 1 174755 MB Logical Drive 1 Partition 0 174500 MB Logical Drive 1 Partition 1 174255 MB ML we eo DE HBA2 WWN211000C0F F000
2. As shown in the following example View Enclosure window under Summary the overall status for Power also specifies Degraded Under the individual component status however Power Supply 0 displays a status of Critical Because Fan 0 is located in Power Supply 0 it also displays a status of Critical Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 97 View Enclosure Server 192 200 200 45 192 200 200 45 Controller Ch 0 Id 0 SUN StorEdge 3511 A A SN 8014612 Manufacturer SUN Firmware Rev 0406 Hodel StorEdge 3511F A Package PLD Rev 699 2o Power On Time NA Enclosure Number po Power On Cycles N A Alarm State ALARMNI O 00000000 Component Status SATA Environmental State o Component Status n Summary Hr emperature 10 z C Poner Degraded Degraded Mi ture 1031 C evade or Fone egraded Battery and voltage status Thermal Good W are not displayed for the voltage 1 3 greyi Voltage 2 5 170 sortase 3 41 gge gt Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array ee E 14 Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array or the Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array voltage 0 0 390 Voltage Critical Critical Battery ss Clase Help Cy Voltage 4 Wa Power Supply and Fan Location The following illustrations identify the location of the power supplies and fans in the Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays For power supply and fan location for the Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array see
3. Server 206 235 238 63 E3000 Card Primary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 3150320 Current Directory JsoptSUNVsscsisscsconsole cfgsayset Selected File test1_rik cfg ration View Saveset Description One RAID 5 2ith 3 drives _ Show other savesets in the current directory This Server Only _ Write a new label to the new LD All Servers File Name Server Card Identifier Save Dat test1_rfk ctg 206 235 238 63 Primary Sun Tue May 07 13 48 30 PD Chapter 7 Maintaining the Array 141 4 Solaris OS only If you want the logical drive s to be automatically labeled which enables the OS to use the drive click Write a new label to the new LD 5 To load the saved configuration select OK The Load Configuration Confirmation window is displayed Carefully review the information presented in the Load Configuration Confirmation window before making a decision to continue Load Configuration Confirmation D Serer 206 235 238 634 ean Card Primary SUN StorEdge 3310 Sh 31 50320 File Mame test _mfk cty Save Date Tue May OF 13 48 30 POT 2002 Save Description One RAID 5 with 3 drives This operation will erase any existing configuration and data Load Array Configuration Eon ke 6 Click Apply to load this configuration or click Cancel to terminate this function Apply causes the configuration operation to continue and a progress window is displayed Note Do not initialize LUN s after r
4. Chapter 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 15 c In the Severity list box scroll through the list of severity levels and choose from the following options Critical A message that requires intervention by the network administrator such as failure of a device power supply or fan Warning Messages that generally indicate internal program events If you see a large number of these messages it might mean that there is a problem with the server or the network Informational Messages about the devices on the server that do not require intervention by the network administrator Whatever level you choose you receive event messages for that level and any other levels at a higher severity If you choose Informational for example you are notified of any critical event Conversely if you want to be notified of only critical situations select Critical and you are not notified of any Informational or Warning events d Click Add to List To delete a user from the list select the mail address and click Delete from List e Specify the mail server to be used Note that the Setup Mail Server button toggles with Change Mail Server depending on whether a mail server has been defined previously For new setups click Setup Mail Server A Mail Server Setup window similar to the following is displayed Mail Server Setup Qutgoing Mail SMTP Sener i ox Hee f Type the IP address o
5. To Stop a Media Scan on a Logical Drive or Physical Drive on page 135 m Failed Drives on page 136 To Automatically Rebuild a Drive Using a Standby Drive on page 136 To Rebuild a Device Without a Standby Drive on page 137 To Check the Progress of the Rebuilding Process on page 138 To Manually Rebuild a Failed Drive on page 138 To Restore a Logical Drive Configuration on page 140 m Controller Maintenance Options on page 143 To Reset the Controller on page 143 To Shut Down the Controller on page 144 To Mute the Controller Beeper on page 144 To Bring a Failed Controller Back Online on page 145 To Display Performance Statistics on page 145 To Get Controller Boot Time on page 146 To Convert a Dual Controller Array to a Single Controller Array on page 147 127 Array Administration Activities Array administration activities such as initialization drive rebuilding and parity checking can take some time depending on the size of the logical drive or physical drives involved After one of these processes has started the Controller Array Progress window is displayed If you close the window to view progress click the Progress Indicator icon or choose View gt Array Admin Progress You can stop any of these processes at any time by clicking Abort Controller Array Progress Server 206 235 238 52 B52 Controller SUM StorEdge 3510 A A 5
6. To stop the parity check click Cancel v To Schedule a Parity Check Choose Array Administration Schedule Parity Check to check parity of a specific logical drive array at scheduled intervals for example during off hours You can choose to schedule any number of logical drives configured on a managed server however you can establish only one schedule per array controller When you schedule multiple logical drives the check is done in sequence from the lowest to the highest numbered logical drive A parity check requires an average of five minutes per Gbyte of storage You can control the amount of system resources allocated to the parity check by changing the rebuild priority To change the rebuild priority see Disk Array Tab on page 189 A parity check can be stopped once it has started There is no corruption as a result of this operation Note You need to be logged in as either ssadmin or ssconfig to access options on this menu 1 Select the controller on which you want to schedule the parity check 130 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 2 Choose Array Administration Schedule Parity Check The Schedule Parity Check window is displayed Schedule Parity Check d a x server 127 0 0 1 localhost Controller Ch 0 Id 1 SUN StorEdge 3510 A A SW 3341331 Listed Logical Drives LD Status RAID Write Policy of Drives Regenerate Generate Error Ev
7. Whenever you start the program after the first time and after you have selected Managed Servers the main window displays server icons for the servers on the Managed Servers list The Menu Toolbar and Tabs The main window includes a menu bar tabs and a toolbar for access to key functions Sun StorEdge TM Configuration Service File View Configuration Array Administration Help Chapter 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 7 8 File Server List Setup Login Logout Save Report View Report Exit Menu Bar The following figure shows the main menu options View Configuration Array Administration Event Log Standard Configure Rebuild View Group Custom Configure Parity Check View Server Save Configuration Schedule Parity Check View HBA Card Load Configuration Media Scan ey Coe Configure Host WWN FC and SATA only Controller Assignment View Logical Drive i i Controller Maintenance View Physical Drive LUN Filter Properties FC and SATA only View Enclosure Download FW for Devices View FRU Array Admin in Progress View Peripheral Device Agent Options Management Help Display HDD under LD Contents About sscsConsole Is displayed only for out of band management Toolbar Located below the menu bar the toolbar provides icons that give you quick access to commonly used functions Select an icon to activate its function Toolbar icons are displayed both as active or inactiv
8. 256 KB Synced Devices ChID Status 2 4 Good 2 4 Good 2 6 Good Manufacturer SEAGATE SEAGATE SEAGATE Capacity ST336F52FSUNS6G 34732 MB disk disk disk SETOMOYOOOOOF 303 SHAOSALAOOOOF 314 SHAOYEJTOOOO 349 ST S367 53FC S46901 ME STSSG753SFSUNSEG S4732 MB For more information about any of the disk drives listed either double click the drive s status record or select the drive and click View The View Physical Drive window is displayed Chapter6 Monitoring the Array 93 View Physical Drive View View Physical Drive presents the characteristics of the selected physical drive You can access it by double clicking the physical device 2 in the main window or by selecting the device and choosing View View Physical Drive View Physical Drive Server 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Ch 0 Id 40 SUN StorEdge 3510 A A SN 8009328 Disk Array Ch 2 Id 3 SEAGATE ST336752FSUN36G 34732 MB Global Standby Disk Information Status Good Size 34732 MB Manufacturer SEAGATE Remaining Size 34476 MB Model 7336 752FSUN36G6 RPM 14996 SN SETONOV000007303 SMART Drive No Product Revision 0205 Node Name WVVN 20000004CFAB138F Node Name WWN and Alternate I O Path are Alternate I O Path not displayed for the Physical Channel ID Path Status PortNarne WN sun StorEdge 3310 2 3 Active 21000004CFAB138F SCSI array or the Sun 3 3 Active 22000004CFAB1 38F StorEdge 3320 SCSI array
9. ID Vendor Product Rev Node Name Port ID 0 Qlogic QLA22xx Adapter B 210000E08B02DE2F 0000EF 240 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 HP UX OS The following steps describe how to determine the HBA WWN on an HP UX host To determine an HBA WWN you must first display devices attached to that host 1 Determine the device name by typing the command ioscan fnC fc All attached devices are displayed 2 Type the following command fcomsutil device name The output displayed includes HBA port and node WWNs E wwn Notepad File Edit Format view Help Vendor ID is OxooLosc Device ID is Oxogolo29 L2 Chip Revision No is 2 3 PCI sub system Vendor ID is axl PCI sub system ID 1s Ox00L28e Topology PRIVATE_LOOP Link Speed 2Gb Local N_Port_id is Oxdoooo1 Local Loop jd is 125 MH Port Noge world wide Name Ox Sog60b00001Le saf N Port Port world wide Name Ox Sog60b0000 Le sae ONLINE SPE 70 0 10967 1 M Driver state Hardware Path is Number of Assisted 105 Number of Active Login Sessions bino Present on card Maximum Frame Size Driver Version a G C PATCH_11 11 libtd a Jun 28 2002 11 08 35 PHSS_26799 Appendix D Determining Host Worldwide Names Fibre Channel and SATA Only 241 IBM AIX OS The following steps describe how to determine the HBA WWN on an IBM AIX host 1 Determine the device name by typing the command lscfg grep
10. Monitoring JBODs on page 223 98 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Power supply 1 Sine Wen T R Fan 1 Right side Power supply 0 Front of array Left side Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI Array and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI Array Power Supply and Fan Location FIGURE 6 1 Right side Front of array Left side FIGURE 6 2 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Array Power Supply and Fan Location 99 Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 100 SAF TE and SES Temperature Sensor Locations Monitoring temperature at different points within the array is one of the most important SAF TE SES functions High temperatures can cause significant damage if they go unnoticed There are a number of different sensors at key points in the enclosure The following tables show the location of each of those sensors which corresponds to the Temperature displayed in the View Enclosure Component Status list For the temperature sensor locations for the Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array see Monitoring JBODs on page 223 TABLE 6 3 Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI Array and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI Array SAF TE Temperature Sensor Locations Temperature ID Location Port A drive midplane temperature sensor 1 Port A drive midplane temperature sensor 2 Port A power supply temperature 1 power supply 0 Port B EMU temperature 2 right module as seen from back 0 1
11. Peripheral Network Protocol Term Gurclk Curvid BIA BIA BIA BIA BIA BIA 1 0GHz Serial 216000COFF804 Auto Seral 226000C0FFADA 2 0GHz Serial 2 0GHz Serial SS 2 0GHz Serial 256000COFFCO Auto Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 179 m Controller Name optional If you want to specify a name for the controller so that you can easily identify it select Controller Name and type the desired name Click OK to save the change The controller name is displayed in various applicable Sun StorEdge Configuration Service windows for convenience m Controller Unique ID reserved The controller unique identifier is automatically set by the SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosure SAF TE or SCSI Enclosure Services SES device The controller unique identifier is used to create Ethernet addresses and WWNs and to identify the unit for some network configurations Caution Do not specify a new nonzero value unless you have replaced the chassis and the original chassis serial number must be retained It is especially important in a Sun Cluster environment to maintain the same disk device names in a cluster Do not change the controller unique identifier unless instructed to do so by qualified service personnel Changes made to the Controller Unique ID do not take effect until the controller is reset v To Save Changed Values The options on the Change Controller Parameters window specified in TABLE 8 2 require
12. Striping nondedicated parity k3 J Block 1 Bic Parity 1 2 Block 4 Block 4 Pari Block 3 Block 5 l c Block 6 Bloc H E Bic Parity 7 8 Block7 FIGURE A 10 RAID 5 Configuration RAID 5 offers increased data transfer rates when data is accessed in large chunks or randomly and reduced data access time during many simultaneous I O cycles Appendix A RAID Basics 219 Advanced RAID Levels Advanced RAID levels require the use of the array s built in volume manager These combination RAID levels provide the protection benefits of RAID 1 3 or 5 with the performance of RAID 1 To use advanced RAID first create two or more RAID 1 3 or 5 arrays and then join them The following table provides a description of the advanced RAID levels TABLE A 2 Advanced RAID Levels RAID Level Description RAID 3 0 30 RAID 3 logical drives that have been joined together using the array s built in volume manager RAID 5 0 50 RAID 5 logical drives that have been joined together using the array s volume manager Local and Global Spare Drives The external RAID controllers provide both local spare drive and global spare drive functions The local spare drive is used only for one specified drive the global spare drive can be used for any logical drive on the array The local spare drive always has higher priority than the global spare drive Therefore if a drive fails and both types of spares are available at the same t
13. b Use Cluster Administrator to install each service as a resource to the group that has the quorum disk For each service enter it in the following order and type its name in the format indicated with the two words run together After each service is installed bring the service online to start it on the active server Enter the services as generic services You are asked to indicate the dependencies for each resource The dependencies in the group are as follows a Disk associated with the quorum disk a Other disk if any to be added to this group Configuration ServiceStartup a Configuration ServiceMonitor Configuration ServiceServer Configuration ServiceStartup is dependent on the two disks that are already in the group Configuration ServiceMonitor is dependent on Configuration Service Startup and Configuration ServiceServer is dependent on Configuration Service Monitor 236 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 16 17 18 19 For the two cluster servers to be displayed as one icon under the cluster IP address edit CLUSTER TXT The file is located in the same directory as the console files It is on the system disk of the computer where the console is installed If Drive C is the system disk the path is C Program Files Sun sscs The following text shows the contents of the file Edit this file to map the cluster IP address to several servers constituting
14. 2 0GHz Serial SS 2 0GHz Serial 256000COFFCO Auto Note The WWPN information is also included in the xml report generated by the console 244 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 APPENDIX E Email and SNMP Sun StorEdge Configuration Service has full event monitoring and email notification capabilities The consoles can send SMTP email messages to a specified list of email addresses Some email systems like Microsoft Exchange can be configured or programmed with scripts to page administration personnel based on events Some paging services also support sending these email messages to a pager The agents place events in the OS error logs Agents can also send SNMP traps about mass storage events to an enterprise management console such as HP OpenView For a list of monitoring software that uses SNMP visit the Sun Management Center at http www sun com software solaris sunmanagementcenter This appendix explains how to set up consoles to send email messages It also explains how to configure servers to send traps to SNMP management consoles describes the trap format and gives background information about SNMP An additional method for sending SNMP traps that does not require Sun StorEdge Configuration Service is also discussed Topics covered in this chapter include a How SNMP Works on page 246 a Using Sun StorEdge Configuration Service to Send SNMP Traps on page 250
15. Close Help m Remaining Size Remaining unused capacity when part of a physical drive s capacity has been used in one or more logical drives m RPM The revolutions per minute of the physical drive a SMART Drive Indicates whether the drive has predictive failure capability m Node Name WWN FC and SATA only Uniquely identifies the physical drive m Alternate I O Path FC and SATA only Reports the status of the available paths between the controller and the physical drives A status of Active for both drives indicates that there is a redundant path between the controller and the physical drives 94 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 View Enclosure The View Enclosure window displays the component and alarm characteristics of an enclosure that is selected in the main window For the Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array View Enclosure also contains SATA MUX and SATA Router information For SCSI the enclosure is identified by the model name Sun StorEdge 3310 A or Sun StorEdge 3320 A Id is always 14 or 15 or Sun StorEdge 3120 A Id depends on the ID switch position For Fibre Channel or SATA the enclosure is identified by the model name Sun StorEdge 3510F A or Sun StorEdge 3511F A Id is always the last Id within the enclosure in which the SES is contained The model name is followed by an A or D A indicates a RAID array unit D indicates a JBOD To view the enclosure eit
16. The Logical Drive Logical Volume Number on page 158 To Scan in New Hard Drives SCSI only When a SCSI array is powered on the controller scans all physical drives that are connected through drive channels Unlike FC and SATA arrays if a SCSI array has completed initialization and then a physical drive is connected the controller does not automatically recognize the new drive until the next controller reset This difference in behavior is due to differences between Fibre Channel and SCSI architectures and protocols A SCSI hard drive can be scanned in and made available without having to shut down the array by performing the following steps 1 Double click the array 2 The View Controller Configuration window is displayed Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 3 Select the Physical Drives tab and click Scan SCSI Drive If a drive fails the Scan SCSI Drive button is also displayed on the Physical Drive window You can select a physical drive select View and click Scan SCSI Drive from the View Physical Drive window l View Controller Configuration Po Sener 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller CH O Id 0 SUM StorEdge 3310 A A SN O0F F25 Status Good A A State Active Global rite Policy Write back A A State Details Active Total Physical Drives 10 View FRU View Controller Params Controllers Physical Drives Enclosure Info Status Manufacturer Good
17. 2 Run the command ames i s sSOY 3 In the dmesg output look for a line similar to Detected scsi disk sdX at scsi lt controller gt id lt channel gt lun lt target gt where the X in sdX is the disk number 4 To create the device entries in dev run the command cd dev MAKEDEV sdxX Where the X in sdX is the disk number 5 Proceed to fdisk format and create a file system Microsoft Windows OS The following steps describe how to discover the replaced drive on a Microsoft Windows OS 1 Install the new drive according to the instructions in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array 2 Select View View Server and click Rescan 3 To verify that the program recognizes the new drive select it on the main window 4 Select View View Physical Drive and verify the information 228 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 HP UX OS The following steps describe how to discover the replaced drive on systems running the HP UX OS 1 Run the command ioscan fnC disk 2 Select View View Server and click Rescan 3 To verify that the program recognizes the new drive select it on the main window 4 Select View View Physical Drive and verify the information 5 If the drive is still not seen the host might need to be rebooted Run the commands sync sync sync reboot IBM AIX O
18. Click Yes The Specify Map Information window is displayed Note that the program automatically maps the logical drive to the first HBA device listed in the host if there is more than one HBA device Specify Map Information Assign Parition Logical Drive 0 Partition 0 103428 MB To techtest Primary Controller Secondary Controller CH ID CH 0 ID 40 v LUN 0 v WAN 210100E0862139EA Card pci 1f4000 pci 4 scsi 5 210100E0862139EA OK Cancel 4 Assign the logical drive to a primary or secondary controller with the desired channels and LUN ID numbers and then click OK A confirmation message is displayed 5 Click Close The assignment of the primary controller or secondary controller to an HBA card is selected for the initial LUN filter assignment and cannot be changed unless you delete the LUN filter assignment and start over To apply a LUN filter to a second host for one array repeat the steps in To Add an HBA Device Manually on page 69 and To Assign a LUN Filter on page 72 In the following example the Sun StorEdge 3510 Fibre Channel device has LUN filters note the letter F for filter to two separate hosts 72 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Caution Because data corruption can occur a warning message is displayed if two users access the same logical drive at the same time This is a characteristic of some host operating systems
19. Click Yes to add the additional host Sun StorEdge T M Configuration Service File View Configuration Array Administration Help Main View Filter View Storage Pools m SUN StorEdge SN 3328237 Managed by Host falcon Logical Drive 0 Partition 0 174000 MB o Gaal HBA2 WWN211000C0FF000010 WWHN 211000COFF000010 falcon HBA2 206 235 238 232 Superfortress SunOS 5 9 o DEE HBA1 WWN2010000101000010 z Logical Drive 0 Partition 1 174755 MB o DEE HBA2 WWN2110000101000010 Logical Drive 1 Partition 0 174500 MB Logical Drive 1 Partition 1 174255 MB WWN 201000C0FF000010 falcon HBA1 oi All Hosts SAAWN 2010000101000010 Superfortress HBA1 Warning WARNING Logical Drive O Partition O 174000 MB is assigned to 206 235 238 67 falcon SunOS 5 8 If file access is not propery coordinated when assigned to multiple hosts data conuption and access contentions may occur Chapter 5 LUN Filtering FC and SATA Only 73 74 v To Delete a LUN Filter 1 From the main window click the Filter View tab 2 From the right pane select the associated WWN and drag and drop it to Storage Pools A warning message is displayed 3 Click Yes A confirmation message is displayed 4 Click Close Sun StorEdge TM Configuration Service File View Configuration Array Administration Help Main View Filter View Q amp
20. Prior to resetting the controller the operation may not proceed normally Do you want to RESET controller 1 Select the Controller Reset check box 2 Make the changes and click OK or 1 Do not select the Controller Reset check box 2 Make the changes and click OK 3 Reset the controller later as explained in To Reset the Controller on page 143 Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 181 Channel Tab 1 From the Channel Settings tab select the channel to be edited 2 Click Change Settings The Change Channel Settings window is displayed For the server to recognize the array a host channel must have an ID assigned to a logical drive and a logical drive mapped to that host channel and ID This window enables you to configure the host drive channel Change Channel Settings Physical Channel Mo 0 Termination Channel Mode Host Default SynceClock 1 0GHz od Default Transfer width Select SCSI ID Range 96 111 od Available SCSI IDs PID Settings 110 Remove PID SID Settings ee Add SID gt Cancel 3 From the Channel Mode list box select either Host or Drive A Drive channel is what the drives are connected to internal or external A host channel is what is connected to the server The most common reason to change the Channel Mode from Host to Drive is to attach expansion units to a RAID array Note The Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array and the Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array support a
21. RAID Levels on page 214 m Local and Global Spare Drives on page 220 RAID Terminology Overview Redundant array of independent disks RAID is a storage technology used to improve the processing capability of storage systems This technology is designed to provide reliability in disk array systems and to take advantage of the performance gains offered by an array of multiple disks over single disk storage RAID s two primary underlying concepts are m distributing data over multiple hard drives improves performance m using multiple drives properly allows for any one drive to fail without loss of data and without system downtime In the event of a disk failure disk access continues normally and the failure is transparent to the host system 209 Logical Drive A logical drive is an array of independent physical drives Increased availability capacity and performance are achieved by creating logical drives The logical drive appears to the host the same as a local hard disk drive does FIGURE A 1 Logical Drive Including Multiple Physical Drives Logical Volume A logical volume is composed of two or more logical drives The logical volume can be divided into a maximum of 32 partitions for Fibre Channel During operation the host sees a nonpartitioned logical volume or a partition of a logical volume as one single physical drive Local Spare Drive A local spare drive is a standby drive assigned to serve one speci
22. Remove the failed controller s serial number from this line RATD_ CONTROLLER Enable 3197861 3179746 Chapter 7 Maintaining the Array 147 5 Start the agent as explained in the installation chapter for your OS 6 Rescan the console if it was open during this procedure 7 In a single controller configuration to avoid the possibility of data corruption disable Write Back Cache See Cache Tab on page 185 for information on disabling Write Back Cache 148 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 CHAPTER 8 Updating the Configuration Refer to this chapter when you want to change the current configuration or add to it This chapter describes the following tasks m To Add a Logical Drive or Logical Volume From New Logical Drives on page 150 m To Add a Logical Volume From Existing Logical Drives on page 155 m To Delete a Logical Drive or Logical Volume on page 157 m To Create a Partition on page 160 m To Delete a Partition on page 162 m To Expand the Capacity of a Logical Drive or Logical Volume on page 164 m To Add Physical Drives to an Existing Logical Drive on page 167 m To Copy and Replace Physical Drives on page 168 m To Scan in New Hard Drives SCSI only on page 170 m To Download RAID Controller Firmware on page 172 m To Upgrade Firmware and Boot Record on page 175 a To Upgrade Firmware on Hard Drives
23. Storage Pools mm SUN StorEdge SN 3328237 Managed by Host falcon Q Ld 206 235 238 67 falcon SunOS 5 8 o Logical Drive 0 Partition 0 174000 MB HBA1 WiWN201000COFF000010 HBA2 WWN211000C0OFF000010 on WWHN 2110000101000010 Superfortress HBA2 HBA1 WAWN2010000101000010 pote WAAN 201000COFF000010 falcon HBA1 o bau gt E 206 235 238 232 Superfortress SunOS 5 9 3 WWN 2010000101000010 Superfortress HBA1 DEJ HBA2 WWN2110000101000010 Warning DH All Hosts WARNING This operation will delete the fiber map WWvWN 201000COFF 000010 falcon HBA1 of Logical Drive 0 Partition O 174000 MB Do you want to continue Yes No Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 CHAPTER 6 Monitoring the Array This chapter explains how to monitor the array using Sun StorEdge Configuration Service It describes the main window and the component view windows that are available when an icon is double clicked in the main window It also explains how the Event Log works and how to use the reporting function It is organized into the following sections The Main Window on page 76 Viewing Detailed Device Information on page 83 Event Log on page 109 Save Report on page 114 View Report on page 117 In Band and Out of Band Storage Management on page 117 Managing Storage Through the Web on page 123 Note Sun St
24. System Drive State Errors 270 Disk State Errors 270 SAF TE State Errors 271 Tape State Errors 271 Redundancy State Errors 273 Internal State Errors 273 Device State Errors 274 Initialization State Errors 274 Client Parameter Errors 274 Open Transport Errors 275 Close Transport Errors 275 Memory Allocation Errors 275 Transport Field Errors 276 Main Communications Errors 276 Communications Link 277 Communications Async 277 Communications Security 277 Timeout Errors 277 Administration Errors 278 Firmware Download Errors 279 System Shutdown Errors 279 Set Config Errors 280 Controller Event Errors 280 Drive Side Event Errors 281 Host Side Event Errors 282 Logical Drive Event Errors 282 Generalized Target Event Errors 283 xiv Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLE G 31 TABLE G 32 TABLE G 33 TABLE G 34 Server Manage Monitor Event Error 286 Substituted Values 286 Error Status Messages 287 Installation and Program Prompts 300 Tables XV xvi Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 FIGURE 5 1 FIGURE 6 1 FIGURE 6 2 FIGURE 6 3 FIGURE 6 4 FIGURE 8 1 FIGURE A 1 FIGURE A 2 FIGURE A 3 FIGURE A 4 FIGURE A 5 FIGURE A 6 FIGURE A 7 FIGURE A 8 FIGURE A 9 FIGURE A 10 FIGURE A 11 FIGURE A 12 FIGURE A 13 Figures Example of LUN Filtering 66 Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI Array and Sun StorEdge 3320 S
25. TABLE 8 3 TABLE A 1 TABLE A 2 TABLE B 1 Tables Main Window Toolbar Icons 9 Main Window Tabs 10 Maximum Number of Supported Logical and Physical Drives Partitions and LUN Assignments 39 Default Stripe Size Per Optimization Mode 42 Default Stripe Size Per Optimization Mode 53 Device Color and Symbol Status 77 Two Server Group Colors 81 Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI Array and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI Array SAF TE Temperature Sensor Locations 100 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Array SES Temperature Sensor Locations 101 Event Log Location 110 Event Record Fields 113 Minimum Web Browser Requirements for UNIX OS 123 Minimum Web Browser Requirements for Microsoft Windows OS 124 Default Stripe Size Per Optimization Mode 152 Change Controller Parameters That Require a Reset 180 Default Stripe Size Per Optimization Mode Kbyte 187 RAID Level Overview 214 Advanced RAID Levels 220 Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI Array SAF TE Temperature Sensor Locations 226 xiii TABLE G 1 TABLE G 2 TABLE G 3 TABLE G 4 TABLE G 5 TABLE G 6 TABLE G 7 TABLE G 8 TABLE G 9 TABLE G 10 TABLE G 11 TABLE G 12 TABLE G 13 TABLE G 14 TABLE G 15 TABLE G 16 TABLE G 17 TABLE G 18 TABLE G 19 TABLE G 20 TABLE G 21 TABLE G 22 TABLE G 23 TABLE G 24 TABLE G 25 TABLE G 26 TABLE G 27 TABLE G 28 TABLE G 29 TABLE G 30 Severity Field 268 Major Field 268 Minor Field 269
26. With this function you can either assign a global or local standby drive or change a ready drive s state to standby or a standby drive s state to ready A drive that is assigned as a global spare rebuilds if a member of any existing drive fails You can have one or more standby drives associated with an array controller Global spares are used in the order in which they are created A local spare has to be assigned to a particular logical drive and only rebuilds for a member within that logical drive 1 In the main window select the desired array controller 2 Choose Configuration Custom Configure or click the Custom Configuration tool If necessary log into the configuration level of the program with the ssconfig password The Custom Configuration Options window is displayed 3 Select Make or Change Standby Drives from the Custom Configuration Options window 202 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 The Make or Change Standby Drives window is displayed Make or Change Standby Drives Server 206 235 238 63 E3000 Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 3150320 Available Physical Drives Manufacturer Status 2 4 SEAGATE ST336bTo2F SUN S66 LOCAL STANDBY LDAI i Ready i Global Standby i Local Standby for LO roan oea eee Check the server and the controller IDs at the top of the window If you want to select a different server or controller click Cancel to ret
27. as explained in Updating the Object Data Manager on an IBM AIX Host on page 206 To Create and Partition a Logical Volume A logical volume is composed of two or more logical drives and can be divided into a maximum of 32 partitions During operation the host sees a nonpartitioned logical volume or a partition of a logical volume as one single physical drive Note Logical volumes are unsuited to some modern configurations such as Sun Cluster environments and do not work in those configurations Use logical drives instead For more information see Logical Volumes on page 38 Create a logical drive as described in Steps 1 11 in To Create and Partition a Logical Drive Using New Configuration on page 49 Note Do not partition the logical drive that you are adding to the logical volume A logical drive that has been partitioned cannot be added to a logical volume Before you click Commit to add the logical drive to a logical volume click Add to LV The logical drive is added to the LV Definition box The total size of the logical volume is displayed in the Available Size MB field Note Because the logical volume has not been partitioned yet the Part Size MB and the Available Size MB are equal A single logical volume is considered to be a single partition Note Mixing SATA and FC logical drives to create a logical volume is not supported Chapter 4 Full Configuration 57 Server 206 2
28. be sure the logical drive is labeled and not excluded by Sun StorEdge Configuration Service if installed Symptom Environmental alarms are not being reported Storage enclosures with SCSI based enclosure monitoring capabilities such as SAF TE cards send environmental alarms to the console The alarm state can be caused by a failure of a drive fan power supply or battery or by an abnormal temperature If an environmental alarm occurs you must click Reset in the View Enclosure window to clear the alarm You need to have configuration security privileges to click Reset in the software Appendix F Troubleshooting 263 Symptom Cannot silence the alarm Storage enclosures with SCSI based enclosure monitoring capabilities such as SAF TE cards send environmental alarms to the console The alarm state can be caused by a failure of a drive fan power supply or battery or by an abnormal temperature To silence an environmental alarm you must push the Reset button on the right ear of the array An alarm can also be caused by a controller event such as when a logical drive fails during a rebuild or when adding a drive Refer to the Event Messages appendix in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for more information about controller events To silence the controller see To Mute the Controller Beeper on page 201 Note Pushing the Reset button has no effect on controller event alarms and muting t
29. board MUX board serial number MUX board type active passive or active active path controller PC150 firmware revision number and firmware boot revision View Enclosure Server 705 235 238 654 storm Controller ch 0 id 40 SUM StorEdge 3511 4 4 SN 8026337 Manufacturer SUN Firmware Rev 0406 0406 Mode StorEdge 3511F Package PLO Rey TOGO 7000 Power Gn Time N A Enclosure Number Power Or Cycles NA Alarm State No Alarm O MUA FW Rey MUX Boot Rew 002520 A A BB42 0300 00252E B42 0300 O0252F BB42 0300 002530 BB42 0300 002531 BB42 0300 0025320 BB42 0300 002533 A a BB42 0300 Battery Battery View ERU View FRU EA Close help Help To view all accessible SATA routers behind the RAID controller click the SATA Router tab The information displayed includes the enclosure ID and enclosure serial number of the chassis that the SATA router resides in the channel number that the router controls slot position of the IOM board that the router resides on router firmware revision number router firmware boot revision customer specified behavior CSB rev a collection of memory resident parameters that define operational behavior of the router hardware revision number and the self test revision number 102 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Server 206 235 238 64 storm Controller Ch 0 Id 40 SUN StorEdge 3511 A A SNHBO2
30. channel CISPR DHCP disk mirroring EMC EMU Fabric Fabric switch failover fault tolerance fault tolerant logical drive FC AL Fibre Channel Fibre Channel HBAs 306 The total number of physical drives available for data storage in a RAID array logical drive For example if the capacity is N 1 and the total number of disk drives in a logical drives is six 36 Mbyte drives the disk space available for storage is equal to five disk drives 5 x 36 Mbyte or 180 Mbyte Channel Any path used for the transfer of data and control information between storage devices and a storage controller or I O adapter Also refers to one SCSI bus on a disk array controller Each disk array controller provides at least one channel International Special Committee on Radio Interference Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See mirroring RAID1 Electromagnetic compatibility Event monitoring unit Fibre Channel network built around one or more switches Functions as a routing engine that actively directs data transfer from source to destination and arbitrates every connection Bandwidth per node via a Fabric switch remains constant when more nodes are added and a node on a switch port uses a data path of up to 100 Mbyte sec to send or receive data A mode of operation for failure tolerant arrays in which a component has failed and its function has been assumed by a redundant component The capacity to cope with internal h
31. on page 176 m To Upgrade Firmware on SAF TE SES Devices on page 177 a To Change Controller Parameters on page 179 m To Save Changed Values on page 180 a To View Environmental Status for the Controller on page 197 m To Mute the Controller Beeper on page 201 m To Assign or Change Standby Drives on page 202 m To Edit a Server Entry on page 204 a To Update the ODM on page 206 149 The Configuration menu commands and tool icons might be temporarily disabled if an administration process such as parity checking is running The menu command is also shown as deactivated when the console is refreshing its inventory on the server A satellite dish symbol is attached to the server icon during the refresh process Efe Note To use the Configuration options you must log into the ssconfig security level of the software with the ssconfig password When you are finished with the configuration activities log back into the monitoring level of the program v To Add a Logical Drive or Logical Volume From New Logical Drives Use this option to add one or more logical drives to an existing configuration of RAID sets or to add a logical volume from new logical drives To add a logical volume from existing logical drives see To Add a Logical Volume From Existing Logical Drives on page 155 Note Logical volumes are unsuited to some modern configurations such as Sun Cluster environments an
32. rebuild process is interrupted by a reset use Rebuild to restart the rebuilding process 1 Replace the failed drive using the instructions contained in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array 2 Wait at least 60 seconds after removing the failed drive before inserting a new drive Make sure the capacity of the replacement drive is at least equal to that of the largest drive in the enclosure 138 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 3 Choose Array Administration Rebuild The Rebuild window is displayed Rebuild Serer 206 295 230 592 B54 Controller Ch 0 Id 0 SUM StorEdge 3510 A A SN SS41275 Rebuild priority High Logical Drives Status Size iM B Write Policy 0 Degraded 22000 Write Back 4 Select the status record of the replacement drive 5 Click Rebuild to start the rebuild process The rebuild process is performed in the background and takes approximately eight minutes per Gbyte when there is no other activity on the array controller During a rebuild normal activity can continue although performance might degrade The degree to which performance degrades is determined by the rebuild priority set for the controller To change the rebuild priority see Disk Array Tab on page 189 6 To check the progress of the rebuilding process choose View Array Admin Progress or click the Progress Indicator icon in the u
33. worldwide node name determining 243 worldwide port name determining 244 Write a new label to the new LD check box 56 142 write back cache enabling 185 write through cache enabling 185 Y yellow device status item 77 Index 321 322 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007
34. 2 3 Port B EMU temperature 1 left module as seen from back 4 5 Port B drive midplane temperature 3 6 Port B power supply temperature 2 Power supply 1 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLE 6 4 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Array SES Temperature Sensor Locations Temperature ID Oo AOA N BDO FF FP WO NY FEF m eae O Location Drive midplane left temperature sensor 1 Drive midplane left temperature sensor 2 Drive midplane center temperature sensor 3 Drive midplane center temperature sensor 4 Drive midplane right temperature sensor 5 Drive midplane right temperature sensor 6 Upper IOM left temperature sensor 7 Upper IOM left temperature sensor 8 Lower IOM left temperature sensor 9 Lower IOM left temperature sensor 10 Left power supply temperature sensor 11 Right power supply temperature sensor 12 SES Voltage Sensors Voltage sensors make sure that the array s voltage is within normal ranges To check the status and determine the location of voltage sensors refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 101 SATA MUX and SATA Router Information To view the SATA multiplexer MUX board information for all SATA drives select the SATA MUX Info tab Each drive has an on MUX board The information for the MUX board includes the channel number and ID of the drive attached to the MUX
35. 235 238 65 Sunblade FEEE ch 0 Id 0 SUN StorEdge 3310 A A Array SN 123456 cut Secondary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 666666 Sa Array Ch 0 Id 14 SUN StorEdge 3310 A mo Primary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 555555 hb 206 235 238 52 B52 Server 206 235 238 65 Sunblade Controller Secondary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 666666 Binding rctri2000 Status Degraded Total Logical Drives 2 Vendor SUN Total Physical Drives 24 Driver StorEdge 3310 Cache Size 512 MB Firmware Rev 3 250 Rebuild Rate Low A A Controller State Active A A Controller 1 A State Details Active View FRU View Controller Params Parttions View FRU is not displayed for the Normal Map Filter Map Sun StorEdge 351 O 2400 MB 3 1 0 Fibre Channel array Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 View Logical Drive View Logical Drive displays the characteristics of the logical drive that is selected in the main window To access this view window use one of the following methods m Double click the logical drive icon i in the main window m Select the logical drive icon and choose View View Logical Drive pep View Logical Drive S O Server 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Primary SUM StorEdge 3510 SMN 8009328 Logical Drive 0 Definition Status Good Effective Size RAID Level RAID 5 Write Policy MumberofDevices 3 Read Policy 4904 TEDO Stripe Size 68850 WE Detaultivrite back Read Ahead
36. Add the server that has started the services to the console s Managed Servers list see To Add Servers on page 12 Be sure to select Auto Discovery and add the ssmon password Use the console software to verify and configure the storage on the active server and then reboot that server Your storage array might already be preconfigured on the dual active active storage subsystem You need to look at the configuration in the tree view to determine whether this is the case If the storage is not configured or you want to change the configuration configure all of the LUNs on one server Later after the MSCS software is installed you can allocate the storage between the servers with Cluster Administrator Use Computer Management to create partitions and format the LUNs on the active server a If necessary reassign drive letters for the disks Note that partitions must be formatted with NTFS Windows sees the LUNs on the dual active active controllers as being on both servers in the cluster You can create partitions and logical drives on only one server Later after MSCS is installed you can use the Cluster Administrator to apportion the storage between the two servers The drive letters for the shared SCSI storage for the two servers must be the same If there is an additional CD ROM drive or external hard disk on one server and not on the other you might need to reassign the drive letters for the shared storage After
37. Checking Abort 1 disk 0 2 Media Checking Abort 2 disk O 4 Media Checking Abort 3 as Depending on the size of the logical drive and the number of physical drives it contains the scanning process might take some time to complete 8 When the Controller Array Progress window shows 100 completion check the event log to determine the condition of the physical disks See Event Log on page 109 for information about viewing the event log v To Stop a Media Scan on a Logical Drive or Physical Drive 1 Select a logical drive 2 Choose Array Administration Media Scan After a few moments the Media Scan window is displayed 3 To stop a media scan on a logical drive click the Logical Drives tab and select the logical drive on which you want to stop the scan To stop a media scan on a physical drive that makes up the logical drive select the Disks tab and select the physical drive on which you want to stop the scan 4 Click Abort Media Scan 5 Click OK to continue 6 Click Close on the Starting Array Administration window Chapter 7 Maintaining the Array 135 Note To stop a media scan on a physical drive you can also select Abort for the on the Controller Array Progress window Failed Drives This section contains procedures for recovering from a drive failure with and without a standby drive If for some reason these procedures do not start the rebuilding process instru
38. Configure Host WWN window is displayed Configure Host WwWwhN Select SUN StorEdge 3000 Family System SUN StorEdge SN 8009328 v Available Hosts Connected Hosts IPAddress Name IPAddress oS techtest 206 6 181 212 SunOS 5 9 z Remove OK Cancel l Help 4 Under Available Hosts look for the host m If you see the host go to Step 9 m If you do not see the host continue with Step 5 5 Under the Available Hosts pane click Add The Add Edit Host window is displayed 6 Enter the host name IP address and the OS and then click Add The Add Edit HBA window is displayed 7 Enter the adapter name and the appropriate WWN and then click OK For details on determining the WWN see Determining Host Worldwide Names Fibre Channel and SATA Only on page 239 8 Click OK to close the Add Edit Host window 9 Under Available Hosts select the host and click Add to add the host to the Connected Hosts list 10 Click OK to close the Configure Host WWN window A confirmation message is displayed 11 Click Close When you return to the Filter View tab the new host is available for LUN filtering 68 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 12 Optional If you want to map multiple hosts to an array select Configuration gt LUN Filter Properties and then choose the array from the Select Sun StorEdge 3000 Family System l
39. Diagnostic Reporter is still connected by displaying a green status For a Solaris host and Linux host stop and restart Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter by typing etc init d ssdgrptd stop fetc init d ssdgrptd start For an HP UX host stop and restart Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter by typing sbin init d ssdgrptd stop sbin init d ssdgrptd start For an IBM AIX host stop and restart Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter by typing usr sbin ssdgrptd start usr sbin ssdgrptd stop Symptom UNIX OS The online help is not displayed Make sure the absolute path name of the web browser you want to use to display online help has been specified 1 For the Solaris Linux and HP UX OS change to opt SUNWsscs sscsconsole For the IBM AIX OS change to usr SUNWsscs sscsconsole 2 Type config_sscon 3 Enter the absolute path name of the web browser Appendix F Troubleshooting 265 266 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 APPENDIX G Error Codes and Messages This appendix provides a list of error codes and status messages for Sun StorEdge Configuration Service For a list of controller error messages refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide m Error Codes on page 268 m Error and Status Messages on page 286 a Installation and Program Prompts on page 300 267 Error Codes Shown and described in the Ev
40. F Host liF Redundancy Peripheral i Network Protocol Peripheral Device Status device name value info status CPU Temp Sensor 5873 00C Over upper threshold Board1 Temp Sensor 5873 00C Over upper threshold Board Temp Sensor 5873 00C Over upper threshold 3 3 Value 3 38V With in safe range 5 Value 5 13V With in safe range 12 V Value 12 44V With in safe range cer OK l Cancel Help Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 197 3 In the Peripheral Device Status box click the scroll bar and scroll down to view environmental status information The threshold ranges for peripheral devices are set using the firmware application If a device exceeds the threshold range that was set its status displays Over upper threshold If a device does not meet the threshold range its status displays Under lower threshold Both events cause the controller icon in the main window to display a red critical device status symbol For information on how to set the threshold ranges refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide Network Tab 1 From the Change Controller Parameters window select the Network tab Change Controller Parameters Serer 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8009328 Controller Information Firmware Yersion 3 31D Boot Record Version 1 31H Serial Number 8009328 CPU Type PPC 50 Controller Name Cache Si 1024MB ECC
41. For details about event monitoring see Event Log on page 109 245 How SNMP Works Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is one of the most widely used protocols for network management It does what its name says it manages network devices in a relatively simple manner SNMP is a simple unacknowledged connectionless protocol SNMP was originally developed to work under the umbrella of the Internet suite of protocols primarily in TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol transport protocols Since then SNMP has been implemented to work over other common transport protocols such as Novell s IPX SPX Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange SNMP Trap Messages Agents use SNMP to send information to enterprise management systems Once a server is configured to send traps event information flows to that system Trap messages contain the following information m OID Object Identifier 1 3 6 1 4 1 2294 1 2 m Event Date MM DD YY such as 01 22 98 m Event Time HH MM SS such as 15 07 23 m Server Address and Name IP Address Name such as 192 187 249 187 Administration m Card Name m Event Severity Informational Warning Critical m The text message The information that is displayed and its format are dependent on the SNMP management console you are using The file RST_OID MIB must be loaded into the enterprise management console for traps to be received On a Solaris Linux a
42. For example if c 100 100 Mbyte x 3 300 Mbyte 300 Mbyte 100 Mbyte 200 Mbyte total capacity added to the logical drive If you know the total maximum drive capacity by which you want to expand a logical drive perform the following calculations based on the RAID level to determine the amount to enter in the Maximum Drive Expand Capacity field m RAID 0 Divide the total maximum drive capacity by the total number of physical drives contained in the logical drive For example if you want to add a total of 100 Mbyte to a logical drive that contains four physical drives 100 Mbyte 4 25 Mbyte maximum drive expand capacity m RAID 1 Divide the total number of physical drives contained in the logical drive by two to get n Then divide the maximum drive capacity by n For example if you want to add a total of 100 Mbyte to a logical drive that contains four physical drives 4 2 2 100 2 50 Mbyte maximum drive expand capacity m RAID 3 and 5 Subtract a single drive from the total number of physical drives to get n Then divide the total maximum drive capacity by n For example if you want to add a total of 100 Mbyte to a logical drive that contains five physical drives 5 1 4 100 4 50 Mbyte maximum drive expand capacity Note The Maximum Drive Expand Capacity cannot exceed the Maximum Available Drive Free Capacity To use the logical drive immediately select OnLine Expansion Online expansion enables you to use the
43. IP address must be entered and added to the Managed Servers list Chapter 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 17 v To Delete Servers 1 Choose File Server List Setup The Server List Setup window is displayed Server List Setup Available Sewers chlanaged Servers 206 656 181 121 Tech lt lt Remove All lt lt 2 Select the server you want to delete from the Managed Servers list 3 Click Remove The server is moved to the Available Servers list 4 Click Delete 18 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 v To Log In and Out The log in and log out functions provide security within the program Administrative functions require access logins and passwords to prevent the possibility of one administrator reallocating or removing storage resources belonging to other clients and hosts without authorization After installing Sun StorEdge Configuration Service you should have assigned separate passwords for the following three levels of security m ssmon Represents the monitoring level of the software it displays alerts from the controller m ssadmin Represents the administration level of the software it provides access to Rebuild Parity Check and Schedule Parity Check functions as well as monitoring m ssconfig Represents the configuration level it provides access to th
44. Install the replacement drive at the same address drive bay as the failed drive Once the failed drive is replaced in the same slot you need to scan it in For detailed instructions on scanning in a drive see To Scan in New Hard Drives SCSI only on page 170 After the drive has been scanned you need to manually rebuild it by choosing Array Administration Rebuild Chapter 7 Maintaining the Array 137 v To Check the Progress of the Rebuilding Process 1 Choose View Array Admin Progress or click the Progress Indicator icon in the upper right corner of the window The Controller Array Progress window is displayed that shows the completion percentage of the rebuild However if there are activities such as initialization rebuild or parity check occurring on multiple controllers the Select Controller Progress window is displayed first 2 Select the controller whose progress you want to view and click OK The Controller Array Progress window is displayed that shows the array progress of the selected controller For more information see Array Administration Activities on page 128 v To Manually Rebuild a Failed Drive In most cases you do not need to use the manual rebuild process because replaced drives are automatically rebuilt If a spare is not present when the failure occurs or for some reason the drive does not rebuild you can use Rebuild to manually start the rebuild process Also if the
45. LUN mapping please wait Device at Channel Target has failed the self reliability test Device information failed Disk d d has changed from s state to s state Disk is labeled successfully Door lock has an unknown status Door locked Door unlocked Download Firmware with Boot Record Downloading Firmware to the devices Downloading Firmware to the RAID Controller Drive SCSI Ch d Id d Likely poorly seated or defective drive If random drives possible I O module or cable failure Email address format is wrong Enclosure Enclosure state change Information x x is the raw data of SAFTE SES data in hexadecimal format Enclosure Enclosure temperature threshold has changed from a State state to a State state Information Engaging firmware a controller reset is not necessary Error in writing file please try later Error occurred Reset the config file Expand LD LV information Expand logical volume successfully Expansion has completed on logical drive LogicalDrive Expansion has started on logical drive LogicalDrive Expansion logical drive LogicalDrive has been aborted Fan Fan has an unknown status Fan Fan is malfunctioning Fan Fan is not present in the system 290 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 TABLE G 33 Error Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Fan Fan is operational File I O error Configuration could not be restore
46. Length 06 Command not Supported 07 Invalid Command 08 Set Configuration General Miscompare 09 Invalid Length 0A Invalid Card Identifier 0B Invalid Card Name 0C Invalid Parameter 0D Invalid Command for Card Type 274 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 TABLE G 12 Client Parameter Errors Continued Error Field Description OE Set Configuration Invalid Additional Parameter OF Set Configuration Block Overlap 10 Set Configuration Device Information Invalid Error Field Open Transport TABLE G 13 Open Transport Errors Error Field Description 01 Open Transport Error Field Close Transport TABLE G 14 Close Transport Errors Error Field Description 01 Close Transport Error Field Memory Allocation TABLE G 15 Memory Allocation Errors Error Field Description 01 Insufficient Memory 02 Insufficient Memory for Administration Operation Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 275 Error Field Transport TABLE G 16 Transport Field Errors Error Field 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B OC Description Lock Fault Insufficient Memory Acquire Lock Fault Release Lock Fault Invalid Command Invalid Length Invalid Card Name Invalid Card Identification No Cards Found No Devices Found Open Fault Card Name not Found Error Field Main Communications TABLE G 17 Main Communications Errors Error Field 01 02 03 04 05 Description Socket
47. New Configuration Option The New Configuration option enables you to customize the logical drive configuration to meet the specific needs of your environment You can configure and partition one or more logical drives with varying RAID levels You can then add two or more logical drives unpartitioned to a logical volume and divide the logical volume into a maximum of 32 partitions Note On UNIX systems if the console locks up during use obtain the process number and then close and reopen the window as described in If Console Locks Up During Use on page 11 Before You Use New Configuration Before you use New Configuration to create a logical drive or a logical volume for the first time it is useful to familiarize yourself with the information contained in the following steps Knowing this information ahead of time will ease the process of creating a logical drive or volume Note Logical volumes are unsuited to some modern configurations such as Sun Cluster environments and do not work in those configurations Use logical drives instead For more information see Logical Volumes on page 38 1 If you have preconfigured logical drives that you want to delete see To Delete a Logical Drive or Logical Volume on page 157 for information including how to unmap assigned LUNs 46 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Note On preconfigured Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA arrays
48. Power Up specifies whether media scan runs automatically following a controller power cycle reset or after logical drive initialization This setting is disabled by default For more information refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide 132 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 If you have disabled or stopped the automatic continuous media scan you can start a media scan manually on a logical drive or a single physical drive that makes up a logical drive It is useful to run a media scan if a drive has failed if drive errors are encountered or when a rebuild is required after replacing a drive 1 Select a logical drive 2 Choose Array Administration Media Scan After a few moments the Media Scan window is displayed Media Scan Sener 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Ch 0 ld 40 SUM StorEdge 3510 A A SM 9009328 Logical Drives Disks LO Status Sizeih B Wirite_Policy Media Scan Good 103426 Detfaultivrite back 4 In Progress Good 34476 Wirite through 2 In Progress Media Scan Priority Normal Iteration Count Single Time a Abort Media Scan Cancel Help 3 To start a media scan on a logical drive click the Logical Drives tab and select the logical drive to scan Chapter 7 Maintaining the Array 133 To start a media scan on a physical drive that makes up the logical drive select the Disks tab and select the physical drive
49. Rebuilding Process 138 To Manually Rebuild a Failed Drive 138 To Restore a Logical Drive Configuration 140 Controller Maintenance Options 143 v lt lt To Reset the Controller 143 To Shut Down the Controller 144 To Mute the Controller Beeper 144 To Bring a Failed Controller Back Online 145 To Display Performance Statistics 145 To Get Controller Boot Time 146 To Convert a Dual Controller Array to a Single Controller Array 147 8 Updating the Configuration 149 v To Add a Logical Drive or Logical Volume From New Logical Drives 150 v To Add a Logical Drive to a Logical Volume 153 Media Scan 155 To Add a Logical Volume From Existing Logical Drives 155 To Delete a Logical Drive or Logical Volume 157 The Logical Drive Logical Volume Number 158 To Create a Partition 160 The Logical Drive Logical Volume Number 162 To Delete a Partition 162 To Expand the Capacity of a Logical Drive or Logical Volume 164 The Logical Drive Logical Volume Number 166 To Add Physical Drives to an Existing Logical Drive 167 viii Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 The Logical Drive Logical Volume Number 168 v To Copy and Replace Physical Drives 168 The Logical Drive Logical Volume Number 170 v To Scan in New Hard Drives SCSI only 170 v To Download RAID Controller Firmware 172 v To Upgrade Firmware and Boot Record 175 Downloading Firmware for Devices 176 To Upgrade Firmware on Har
50. Rights field and click Add in that window The Security tab is displayed with the new name on the Accepted Community Names list Note Community names or community strings are case sensitive 6 Optional If desired change the default setting of Accept SNMP Packets from Any Host to Only Accept SNMP Packets from These Hosts and add the network address of the enterprise management computer that receives the traps from the agent on the server To add the network address of the computer with Sun StorEdge Configuration Service console software to the lower list box click Add to access the Security Configuration window Type the IP address in the Entry box and click Add in that window The Security tab reappears with the Configuration Service management console computer s address 7 Click OK v To Specify the Trap Recipient for a Microsoft Windows Host In this procedure you are listing the enterprise management console as a recipient of traps from the server 254 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 Note For the procedure you need the IP address of the enterprise management console that receives the traps The procedure also requires the same community name as specified in the preceding sections The steps for specifying an enterprise management console computer as the recipient of the agent traps are as follows Click the Traps tab of the Microsoft SNMP Properties window to display
51. Sensor Locations Temperature ID Location 0 1 5 Temperature sensor on chassis 2 Temperature sensor on power supply 0 3 Temperature sensor on left side EMU module 4 Temperature sensor on right side EMU module 6 Temperature sensor on power supply 1 226 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 To Download Firmware for Devices For instructions on how to download firmware to disk drives for the Solaris host refer to the README file in the patch that contains the firmware For patch information refer to the release notes for your array To Discover a Drive Drive failure places the JBOD in a critical state A red device status symbol D 1S displayed on the JBOD device in the main window After replacing a failed drive perform the following steps to discover the drive Solaris OS The following steps describe how to discover the replaced drive on systems running the Solaris OS If the drive comes back online automatically that is the red device status symbol is dismissed run the command devfisadm Run the command format If the drive does not come back online automatically that is the red device status symbol is not dismissed perform a reconfiguration reboot by running the command reboot r Appendix B Monitoring JBODs 227 Linux OS The following steps describe how to discover the replaced drive on systems running the Linux OS 1 Reboot the system
52. Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Specifying Non Default Stripe Sizes Depending on the optimization mode and RAID level selected newly created logical drives are configured with the default stripe sizes shown in TABLE 8 3 TABLE 8 3 Default Stripe Size Per Optimization Mode Kbyte RAID Level Sequential I O Random I O 0 1 5 128 32 3 16 4 When you create a logical drive you can replace the default stripe size with one that better suits your application For sequential optimization available stripe size choices include 16 Kbyte 32 Kbyte 64 Kbyte 128 Kbyte and 256 Kbyte For random optimization available stripe size choices include 4 Kbyte 8 Kbyte 16 Kbyte 32 Kbyte 64 Kbyte 128 Kbyte and 256 Kbyte Note Default stripe sizes optimize performance for most applications Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for information about how to set the stripe size for a logical drive Once the stripe size is selected and data is written to logical drives the only way to change the stripe size of an individual logical drive is to back up all its data to another location delete the logical drive and create a logical drive with the stripe size that you want Maximum Number of Disks and Maximum Usable Capacity for Random and Sequential Optimization The maximum capacity per logical drive supported by the RAID firmware is a 16 Tbyte with Random Optimization m 64 Tbyte with Sequential O
53. StorEdge 3510 Fibre Channel array in xm1 format which can be used as input into another program CODE EXAMPLE 6 1 Excerpt From Sun StorEdge 3510 Fibre Channel Array Report lt raidbaseview gt lt raidsystem gt lt name gt SUN StorEdge 3510 A A Array SN 000198 lt name gt lt status gt Good lt status gt lt manufacturer gt SUN lt manufacturer gt lt model gt StorEdge 3510 lt model gt lt firmware_version gt 3 27K lt firmware_version gt lt bootrecord_version gt 1 31H lt bootrecord_version gt lt mac_address gt 00 C0O FF 00 01 98 lt mac_address gt lt ip gt 206 235 238 198 lt ip gt lt netmask gt 255 255 255 0 lt netmask gt lt gateway gt 206 235 238 1 lt gateway gt lt primary_sn gt 3341275 lt primary_sn gt lt secondary_sn gt 3341258 lt secondary_sn gt lt controller_ name gt 198 lt controller_ name gt lt unique_1d gt 198 lt unique_id gt lt id_of_nvram_defaults gt 327K 3510 v2 39 lt id_of_nvram_defaults gt lt total_ logical _drives gt 8 lt total_logical_drives gt lt total_logical_volumes gt 0 lt total_logical_volumes gt lt total_partitions gt 278 lt total_partitions gt lt total_physical_drives gt 24 lt total_physical_drives gt lt total_safte ses devices gt 1 lt total_safte ses devices gt lt cache_size gt 1024MB ECC SDRAM lt cache_size gt lt cpu gt PPC750 lt cpu gt lt battery gt Good lt battery gt lt node_name gt 206000COFF000198 lt node_name gt lt fru gt lt idx gt 0 lt idx g
54. Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for more information Make sure you have set up a static or dynamic IP address for the array If the program has been configured already to manage the array through in band you can set the IP address through Change Controller Parameters To set the IP address see In the Peripheral Device Status box click the scroll bar and scroll down to view environmental status information on page 198 If the program has not been configured yet you can set the IP address through an RS 232 terminal Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array After setting the IP address reset the controller Choose Array Administration Controller Maintenance and then click Reset the Controller Select the server Select View gt Agent Options Management Type the IP address of the array in the IP Address field and click Add If you have created a password for the array using the firmware application type it in the Password field and then re type it in the Verify Password field Note By default there is no password set for the array For information on creating or changing the password refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for your array Check Out Of Band Agent preferred over In Band and click OK Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 119 Note With this option checked out of band becomes the pr
55. a MIB Variable Appendix E Email and SNMP 249 Using Sun StorEdge Configuration Service to Send SNMP Traps This section explains how to use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service to send email messages for each server v To Send Email Messages for Each Server Configure the console to send email messages for each managed server through the Server List Setup function 1 Choose File Server List Setup The Server Setup window is displayed Available Servers Managed Servers ee gt gt Add All 206 235 230 565 SunBlada EE 206 295 238 710 E3000 206 295 278 683 E3000 gt Add gt Remove All Delete i server Limit 1 GUPS cantel eee 2 Click Add If the server has already been added you need to move it to the Available Servers list and click Edit 250 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 The Add Server window or Edit Server window is displayed The two windows have the same fields peal Add Server Sener name Properties Mailing Lists Grouping Network Information IF Address Socket Pon Mot assigned Get IP Addr by Mame l Monitoring Login ssmon Password Auto discovery Yes Mo 3 If you have not already added the server fill in the information about the Properties tab For detailed information see Add a server on page 13 4 To send event messages using email select the Mailing Lists tab The Add S
56. a logical drive or logical volume into several partitions or use the entire logical drive as single partition Partition O 2 GB Logical drive 0 RAID 5 8 GB Se Partition 1 1 GB Partition 2 5 GB Partition O 1 5 GB Partition 1 1 0 GB Logical drive 1 ae RAID 3 4 GB Partition 2 1 5 GB FIGURE A 3 Partitions in Logical Drive Configurations 212 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 Each partition is mapped to LUNs under host SCSI IDs or IDs on host channels Each SCSI ID LUN acts as one individual hard drive to the host computer ID 1 LUN O Logical drive 1 LUN 0 Logical drive O Partition O Partition 2 2 5 GB 5 GB shel Logical drive 0 ELAN Logical drive 1 Partition 1 Partition 1 ras 1 5 GB LUN 2 Logical drive 1 LUN 2 Logical drive 0 Partition 2 Partition 0 2 5 GB 2 GB FIGURE A 4 Mapping Partitions to Host ID LUNs Logical drive 1 Logical drive O Logical drive 0 Partition O Partition 2 Partition 0 ion D Logical drive O Logical drive 1 Logical drive 1 Partition 1 Partition 1 Partition 2 FIGURE A 5 Mapping Partitions to LUNs Under an ID Appendix A RAID Basics 213 RAID Levels There are several ways to implement a RAID array using a combination of mirroring striping duplexing and parity technologies These various techniques are referred to as RAID levels Each level offers a mix of performance reliability and cost Each level uses a distinct a
57. a password prompt is displayed type the ssconfig password The Controller Maintenance Options window is displayed Select Download Firmware with Boot Record The Select Boot Record File window is displayed Look in C3 ssesconsole El A E EEA so J cfysavset 4 hipfiles EJ lib C browser default Console htrn console keystore 0 errlog tet i eventlog tet File name a Filesoftype All Files Select the boot record and click Open Select the appropriate firmware file The Select Firmware File is displayed Click Open The Confirmation Dialog window is displayed Repeat Steps 6 through 8 in the previous subsection Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 175 176 Downloading Firmware for Devices This option enables you to upgrade the firmware on hard drives and SAF TE SES devices v To Upgrade Firmware on Hard Drives 1 Select the array 2 Choose Array Administration Download FW for Devices 3 Click the Download FW for Disks tab 4 Select either To All disks under Controller and select an array from the menu or select To All disks under LD and select the logical drive from the menu m If there are drives that you do not want the new firmware downloaded to select them from Selected Disks and click Remove m If there are logical drives that you want to add select them from Available Disks and click Add a If you have multiple drives that
58. amp Sun microsystems Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide Sun Microsystems Inc www sun com Part No 817 3337 17 March 2007 Revision A Submit comments about this document at http www sun com hwdocs feedback Copyright 2002 2007 Dot Hill Systems Corporation and others 2200 Faraday Avenue Suite 100 Carlsbad California 92008 USA All rights reserved Sun Microsystems Inc and Dot Hill Systems Corporation may have intellectual property rights relating to technology embodied in this product or document In particular and without limitation these intellectual property rights may include one or more of the U S patents listed at http www sun com patents and one or more additional patents or pending patent applications in the U S and other countries This product or document is distributed under licenses restricting its use copying distribution and decompilation No part of this product or document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Sun and its licensors if any Third party software is copyrighted and licensed from Sun suppliers Parts of the product may be derived from Berkeley BSD systems licensed from the University of California UNIX is a registered trademark in the U S and in other countries exclusively licensed through X Open Company Ltd Sun Sun Microsystems the Sun logo Sun StorEdge AnswerBook2 docs sun com Java and Solari
59. array and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array Physical Drives Logical Partitions per Partitions per LUN Assignments Drives Logical Drive Logical Volume 36 1 array and2 16 32 32 128 expansion units 108 1 array and8 32 32 32 128 point to point mode expansion units 64 point to point mode redundant configuration 1024 loop mode 512 loop mode redundant configuration 72 1 array and5 32 32 32 128 point to point mode expansion units 64 point to point mode redundant configuration 1024 loop mode 512 loop mode redundant configuration To Use Standard Configuration Use Standard Configuration Options to configure all of the storage attached to an array controller using one RAID level All you need to specify is the RAID controller optimization mode RAID level and whether you want a standby drive Sun StorEdge Configuration Service then automatically configures the storage for you creating one or more logical drives depending on the RAID level and the number of drives available Write back cache is selected by default You are able to see the resulting configuration and accept or reject it before it is completed Caution Standard Configuration creates one large logical drive In FC and SATA configurations with large device capacities the size of the logical drive might exceed the device capacity limitation of your OS Be sure to check the device c
60. en restreignent l utilisation la copie la distribution et la d compilation Aucune partie de ce produit ou document ne peut tre reproduite sous aucune forme par quelque moyen que ce soit sans l autorisation pr alable et crite de Sun et de ses bailleurs de licence s il y en a Le logiciel d tenu par des tiers et qui comprend la technologie relative aux polices de caract res est prot g par un copyright et licenci par des fournisseurs de Sun Des parties de ce produit pourront tre d riv es des syst mes Berkeley BSD licenci s par l Universit de Californie UNIX est une marque d pos e aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays et licenci e exclusivement par X Open Company Ltd Sun Sun Microsystems le logo Sun Sun StorEdge AnswerBook2 docs sun com Java et Solaris sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques d pos es de Sun Microsystems Inc aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays Netscape est une marque de Netscape Communications Corporation aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays LA DOCUMENTATION EST FOURNIE EN L ETAT ET TOUTES AUTRES CONDITIONS DECLARATIONS ET GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU TACITES SONT FORMELLEMENT EXCLUES DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE Y COMPRIS NOTAMMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE A L APTITUDE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A L ABSENCE DE CONTREFA ON Ka Adobe PostScript Contents Preface xix Introduction 1 Before You Begin 3
61. failed Out of the scope Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 293 TABLE G 33 Error Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Parity Check Aborted Parity check confirmation Parity check could not be started on logical drive LogicalDrive Parity check has completed on logical drive LogicalDrive Parity check has started on logical drive LogicalDrive Parity check on logical drive LogicalDrive has been aborted Parity check schedule has been removed Parity check schedule has been updated Partition 0 cannot be deleted Partition table is full New partitions cannot be added Password error Password is empty Port is invalid port must be between 0 and 65535 Port is invalid port must be between 1270 and 1273 Power supply Power has an unknown status Power supply Power is malfunctioning and has been switched off Power supply Power is malfunctioning or disabled Power supply Power is not present in the system Power supply Power is operational but disabled Power supply Power is operational Power supply Power is present in the system Primary controller failed Probe Agent command error Progress Not Available RAID Controller firmware checksum failed corrupt firmware data RAID Controller firmware download has failed RAID Controller firmware has been updated RAID Controller is back online Read config file error Rebuild on logical drive LogicalDrive has been aborted 294 Sun S
62. have different product IDs make sure you select the product ID for the drive s to which you are downloading firmware from the Product ID list box Download Firmware for Disk or SAFTE SES Devices File Name Browse ProductID Download FW for Disks Download FW for SAFTE SES Devices Available Disks Card chID Vendor ProductID Revision Size StorEdge 3510 SN 33 216 SEAGATE ST336752FSU 34732MB StorEdge 3510 SN 33 217 SEAGATE ST336752FSU 34732MB StorEdge 3510 SN 33 2 18 SEAGATE ST336752FSU 34732MB StorEdge 3510 SN 33 2 19 SEAGATE ST336752FSU 34732MB gt To All disks under Controller To All disks under LD Selected Disks Card ChiD Vendor ProductID Revision Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Click Browse and locate the download firmware file Select Open Select the download firmware file click Open and click OK The firmware starts to download When the progress reaches 100 click OK To verify that the firmware has downloaded successfully select View View Physical Drive and make sure the firmware version has changed in the Product Revision field So that the console displays properly you need to probe for new inventory Select the server icon and choose View View Server Probe to send a command to the selected server to probe for new inventory To U
63. host manually if you do not see the desired host Adding an HBA device manually if you do not see the desired HBA Removing standard mapping Assigning the LUN filter To Access the LUN Filter View From the main window click the Filter View tab Click the container symbol to expand the device trees for detailed views of the servers hosts in the left pane and the array devices in the right pane Sun StorEdge T M Configuration Service File View Configuration Array Administration Help HARRA 8 Main View Filter View Hosts Storage Pools ee jimm SUN StorEdge SN 3328237 Managed by Host falcon z Logical Drive 0 Partition 0 174000 MB oi All Hosts z Logical Drive 0 Partition 1 174755 MB Logical Drive 1 Partition 0 174500 MB Logical Drive 1 Partition 1 174255 MB Ld 206 235 238 67 falcon SunOS 5 8 To Add a New Host Manually If you do not see the desired host displayed in the left pane under Hosts add it manually through the Configure Host WWN window From the main window click the Filter View tab Choose Configuration Configure Host WWN Note If the Configure Host WWN option is not enabled select any one of icons in the left pane to enable it Chapter 5 LUN Filtering FC and SATA Only 67 3 If are not already logged in as ssconfig or ssadmin a password prompt is displayed Type the password and click OK The
64. is a command line interface Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 out of band parity check partner group PID PLA PLD RAID RAID Level RARP RAS read policy rebuild rebuild priority Refers to the connections and devices that are not in the data path A process whereby the integrity of the redundant data on fault tolerant arrays RAID 3 and 5 is checked The parity checking procedure on a logical drive recalculates the parity of data stripes in each of the logical drive s RAID stripe sets and compares it with the stored parity If a discrepancy is found an error is reported and the new correct parity is substituted for the stored parity For RAID 1 configurations data is compared with mirrored data but since RAID 1 does not store parity no automatic correction is possible A pair of interconnected controller units Expansion units interconnected to the pair of controller units can also be part of the partner group Primary controller identifier number Programmable Logic Array Offers flexible features for more complex designs Programmable logic device A generic term for an integrated circuit that can be programmed in a laboratory to perform complex functions redundant array of independent disks An arrangement of two or more disk drives combined into a single virtual drive to provide more disk storage space better performance and reliability and redundant ba
65. is also included in the xml report generated by the console Appendix D Determining Host Worldwide Names Fibre Channel and SATA Only 243 v To Determine the FC Array WWPN 1 Double click the array icon f in the main Configuration Service window or select it and choose View View Controller 2 Click View Controller Parameters The RAID Controller Parameters window is displayed On the Channel tab scroll all the way to the right to display the WWPN Sener 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Information Firmware version Serial Mumber Controller Hame 15 Chars Max Controller Unique ID Hex format O Mot Defined _ Controller Reset Channel RS 232 Chl LogChl Mode 0 Host Host Drive Drive Host Host 4 11E a008 Change Controller Parameters Controller CPL Type TECH Fc Cache Size Cache Type FIBRE FIBRE FIBRE FIBRE FIBRE FIBRE Disk Array PID 40 BJA 14 14 44 Drive IF SID BIA 42 15 15 46 Host F Det lk Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto OO40E2 Append File ID _ Mute Beeper Detyvid Serial Serial Serial Serial Serial Serial Boot Record Version Redundancy Primary SUM StorEdge 3510 SN 9009328 1 31H FPFEr50 1024MB ECC SDRAM 411E 3510 5421F Feripheral Metwork Protocol Term Gurclk Curvvid BIA BJA BIA BJA BIA BIA 1 0GHz Serial 216000COFF804 Auto Seral 226000COFFAD4 2 0GHz Serial
66. line initialization requires less time than on line initialization Note On line Initialization does not apply to logical volumes Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 151 11 Select the stripe size Select Default to assign the stripe size per Optimization mode as specified in TABLE 8 1 or select a different stripe size TABLE 8 1 Default Stripe Size Per Optimization Mode RAID Level Sequential I O Random I O 0 1 5 128 32 3 16 4 Once the stripe size is selected and data is written to logical drives the only way to change the stripe size of an individual logical drive is to back up all its data to another location delete the logical drive and create a logical drive with the stripe size that you want 12 Specify Default Write through or Write back as the Write Policy for the logical drive The write policy determines when cached data is written to the disk drives The ability to hold data in cache while it is being written to disk can increase storage device speed during sequential reads Write policy options include write through and write back Using write through cache the controller writes the data to the disk drive before signaling the host OS that the process is complete Write through cache has lower write operation and throughput performance than write back cache but it is the safer strategy with minimum risk of data loss on power failure Because a battery module is installed power is supplied to the data cac
67. logical drive before expansion is complete However because the controller is building the logical drive while performing I O operations expanding a logical drive online requires more time than offline expansion If you do not select OnLine Expansion you can use the drive only after expansion is complete Because the controller is building the logical drive without having to also perform I O operations offline expansion requires less time than online expansion Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 165 Note The Online Expansion option is not available when expanding logical volumes Dynamically Grow and or Reconfigure LDs L Vs Server 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8009328 Select a LD LY LD L Drvs Parts RAID Assignment Status Size LD 0 4 1 5 jiha AAN a Lad ec If you used the full capacity of the logical drive when it was created O is displayed there is no room to expand Expand LD LV Add SCSIDrives Copy and Replace Drive unless you add another logical drive Maximum Available Drive Free Capacity 0 MB Maximum Drive Expand Capacity D MB OnLine Expansion No operation Cancel Help 8 Click OK in the Confirm Configuration Operation window to complete the operation and click Close The Logical Drive Logical Volume Number For important information regarding the logical drive logical volume number displayed in the LD LV field in the Dyna
68. maximum of two host channels Note Depending on the controller configuration you might need to select both primary and secondary channel IDs as described in the following steps 182 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Caution Sun StorEdge arrays are preconfigured with host drive and RCCOM channel settings Sun StorEdge Configuration Service cannot configure or show RCCOM channels Before configuring a host or drive channel review the channel assignments using the firmware application In a redundant controller configuration if the RCCOM channel settings are overwritten using Sun StorEdge Configuration Service intercontroller communication stops and unexpected results might occur For more information refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide From the Available SCSI IDs list box select the primary channel ID which is designated as PID and click Add PID If you have two controllers installed select a secondary channel ID from the Available SCSI IDs list box and click Add SID Note For the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array and the Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array if you add more than four host channel IDs the LUNs Per Host ID parameter see Host I F Tab on page 192 must be set to a value less than 32 For changes to take effect reset the controller Changing Host ID in a Fibre or SATA Configuration If you want an ID higher than 15 select
69. names or values 1 The settings on your browser might differ from these settings Examples Edit your login file Use 1s a to list all files You have mail su Password Read Chapter 6 in the User s Guide These are called class options You must be superuser to do this To delete a file type rm filename Related Documentation The following table contains a list of related software documentation For a complete list of all related documentation refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array Title Part Number Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI Array Release Notes 816 7955 Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI Array Release Notes 819 7109 Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI Array Release Notes 817 7660 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC and 3511 SATA Array Release Notes 817 6597 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family 2 4 Software Installation Guide 817 3764 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware 4 2 User s Guide 817 3711 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Diagnostic Reporter 2 4 User s Guide 817 3338 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI 2 4 User s Guide 817 4951 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Controller Firmware Migration Guide 819 6573 xxii Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Accessing Sun Documentation All Sun StorEdge 3000 family array documentation is available online at the following location http www sun com products n solutions hardware docs Network _Storage_Solutions Workgr
70. not logged by default You might need to change etc syslog conf to enable it to write to a log file Modify etc syslog conf to add the following line info tmp syslog rotate size 1000k Make sure the file that is specified in the added line exists If it does not exist you need to create it For example in the above configuration you would create a file named tmp syslog Change to tmp syslog and restart the syslog by typing kill HUP cat etc syslog pid Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 111 Event Log Window To access the Event Log window choose View Event Log You can hide this window by clicking Close You can then reopen it from the View menu without losing any content Event Log Date Time Server Card Severity Error code 05 08 2002 15 15 01 206 235 238 632 E HBA 3 Ch 0 Informational 030b2007 01 ff00 05 08 2002 10 18 51 206 235 238 65 S Informational 05 08 2002 08 55 44 206 235 238 65 S Informational 03060803 05 07 2002 14 36 15 206 235 238 65 5 HBA 1 Ch 0 Critical 01060801 O5 07 2002 14 37 40 206 235 238 63 E HBA 3 Ch 0 Critical 010b0202 05 07 2002 14 36 33 206 235 238 63 E HBA 3 Ch 0 Critical 010b2003 00fff00 O5 07 2002 14 36 27 206 235 238 63 E HBA 3 Ch 0 Informational 03081602 03000000 O5 07 2002 14 34 02 206 235 238 63 E HBA 3 Ch 0 Warning 020b1e02 02000200 05 07 2002 14 25 08 206 235 238 63 E HBA 3 Ch O Warn
71. objectIdentifier of MIB variable 249 protocol data unit PDU 248 request types 248 security 248 software model 247 V1 248 SNMP traps messages description 246 setting using Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 250 without using Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 258 Index 319 setup 253 Solaris OS event log location 110 LG not present 263 rstrapd 262 SNMP traps 256 stopping console 11 spares assigning global 192 ssmon password bypassed 14 sstrapd daemon 256 257 258 Standard Configuration 39 Standard Configuration icon 9 standby drive making changing 202 starting Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Microsoft Windows OS 7 Solaris Linux HP UX and IBM AIX OS 6 status fans 96 groups 80 power supplies 96 temperature 96 storage managing through the web 123 browser requirements 123 stripe size random optimization 42 53 152 187 sequential optimization 42 53 152 187 Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array fan location 226 monitoring 223 power supply location 226 SAF TE temperature sensor location 226 supported functionality 4 Sun StorEdge Configuration Service agent operation 81 console 76 logging in logging out 19 main window 76 monitoring process 81 overview 1 starting 6 tree view 79 SuperFlex storage array 235 system user password usage 14 T tabs described 10 Tag Count Per drive field 191 TCP IP establishing connection 81 temperature status 96 toolba
72. one row to remove it Select Server for Managing Controller Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 301 TABLE G 34 Installation and Program Prompts Continued Installation and Program Prompts Select the agent before clicking Remove Select the agent item before clicking Edit Select the Channel ID of the drive you want to scan Select the firmware file before downloading it Select the Logical Drive s Select the server item before clicking Edit Select the server item before clicking Remove Select the Starting Day Specify Map Information SUNWsscsConsole needs JRE 1 2 2 1 3 or 1 4 to run The Console will try to find itin usr java usr jre usr local java or usr local jre If you installed the JRE in a directory other than one mentioned above make a link The client receives events only when it is running Are you sure you want to exit The Content of Periodic Trap cannot be Event Please select another one The controller needs to be reset for the new firmware to take effect Do you want to reset the controller The encrypt key you entered includes extra space in the beginning or at the end which can cause encryption errors Do you want to continue This may cause data loss Are you sure you want to move This operation overwrites the present configuration Any existing LDs LVs are deleted and all data is lost If you want to keep your present configuration use the Add LDs LVs to the Current C
73. policy is only automatically switched for logical drives with write policy configured to Default See Peripheral Tab on page 195 for more information about event trigger operations m Write back Assigns write back cache regardless of any changes to the global write policy m Write through Assigns write through cache regardless of any changes to the global write policy Click OK The Confirm Configuration Operation window is displayed showing the new configuration Click OK to accept the configuration as indicated otherwise click Cancel to return to the console Chapter 4 Full Configuration 43 14 HP UX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to run the ioscan fnC disk command Note If you used System Administrator Manager sam to unmount the file system make sure it is closed before running the ioscan command 15 IBM AIX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to update the Object Data Manager ODM as explained in Updating the Object Data Manager on an IBM AIX Host on page 206 Media Scan A firmware menu option called Media Scan at Power Up specifies whether media scan runs automatically following a controller power cycle reset or after logical drive initialization This setting is disabled by default For more information refer to the Sun StorEdge 300
74. run the ioscan fnC disk command Note If you used System Administrator Manager sam to unmount the file system make sure it is closed before running the ioscan command IBM AIX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to update the Object Data Manager ODM as explained in Updating the Object Data Manager on an IBM AIX Host on page 206 To Add a Logical Drive to a Logical Volume A logical volume is composed of two or more logical drives and can be divided into a maximum of 32 partitions During operation the host sees a nonpartitioned logical volume or a partition of a logical volume as one single physical drive Note Logical volumes are unsuited to some modern configurations such as Sun Cluster environments and do not work in those configurations Use logical drives instead For more information see Logical Volumes on page 38 Create a logical drive as described in Step 1 Step 15 in To Add a Logical Drive or Logical Volume From New Logical Drives on page 150 Note Do not partition the logical drive that you are adding to the logical volume A logical drive that has been partitioned cannot be added to a logical volume Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 153 2 Before you click Commit to add the logical drive to a logical volume click Add to LV The logical drive is added to the LV Definition box The total size of the log
75. status to the console about these devices The agent software needs to be installed on each individual server in the network that is part of Sun StorEdge Configuration Service m Sun StorEdge Configuration Service console Displays the information reported by the agents The console also provides remote configuration and management of the devices from a single workstation The console needs to be installed on a computer that manages the servers on your network You can have a maximum of 10 clients connected to the same Sun StorEdge Configuration Service agent Clients include Sun StorEdge Configuration Service consoles and Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter daemons 2 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 CHAPTER 2 Before You Begin This chapter contains important information you need to be aware of before you use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Topics covered in this chapter include Installing the Software on page 3 Example Screens on page 3 Superuser Privileges on page 4 Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI Array on page 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family JBODs on page 4 Installing the Software For installation instructions refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Installation Guide Example Screens Many example screens are provided throughout this guide to demonstrate the program These screens might identify either the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array Sun StorEd
76. the cluster The format of the entry is lt Cluster IP Address gt lt serverl IP Address gt lt server2 IP Address gt The IP address must be in dot form Example If the cluster IP address is 151 239 130 70 and the IP addresses of individual servers are 151 239 130 71 and 151 239 130 72 the entry would be t 15 299130 70S Lolo oe ee Le Otw 239 130 72 IMPORTANT NOTE Use only the Cluster IP address to configure a cluster server on the Configuration Service console 1514239 130 702 151 239 130 71 151 239 130 72 Edit the last line of the file to insert the IP address of the cluster and then the IP addresses of the two servers that make up the cluster by removing the number symbol Start the console and remove the first server from the Managed Servers list and add the cluster as a server to the list Access the Server List Setup function See To Add Servers on page 12 Be sure to select Auto Discovery and add the ssmon password If you type in the cluster name the program supplies the IP address if your network has DNS At this point the cluster configuration is properly configured to work with the program If the server that has the services running on it malfunctions its disk groups are transferred to the second server and the Cluster Administrator automatically starts the services on that server Appendix C Using the Cluster Configuration SCSI Only 237 Note When one server fails i
77. the operation is complete before ejecting the cartridge Unable to inquire RAID controller Unable to inquire SAF TE device SAF TE monitoring for this enclosure disabled 298 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 TABLE G 33 Error Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Unable to inquire tape device This device will be removed Unable to issue Self Reliability Query on device at Channel Target Unable to log events Unable to open bindings file or no bindings present Check Bindings file Unable to open I O transport layer Unable to query TapeAlert log data TapeAlert monitoring disabled for this device Unable to read license data Unable to read response from SMTP server Unable to send e mail to SMTP server Unable to toggle the speaker on the SAF TE SES managed enclosure Unable to validate recipient at SMTP server Unable to write license data UNMAPPED LUN NOT AVAILABLE TO HOST Username is empty Wait for mutex failed Write config file error Wrong Fax number format Wrong Phone number format You must first delete the host mapping for the partitions whose index number is greater before you can change this partition You must first delete the host mapping for this LD LV before you can delete it You must first delete the host mapping of the last partition before you can add a new partition You must have superuser administrator privileges to run thi
78. this step check them on the other server to make sure they are the same b Write down the drive letters assigned to the shared storage Appendix C Using the Cluster Configuration SCSI Only 235 10 11 12 13 14 15 Access the second server start Computer Management and make sure that the second server has the same drive letters as the first If it does not reassign the drive letters so that they are consistent on both servers Shut down the second server Install the MSCS software on the first server and reboot Start Cluster Administrator and make sure that it can see the cluster Access the second server install MSCS on that server by joining it to the first and reboot Reboot the second server and verify in Cluster Administrator that both servers are included in the cluster Adjust the disk groups in the Cluster Administrator Make sure that the quorum disk and the other disks if any are together in one disk group under the first server where you originally configured the storage Refer to the MSCS documentation for details to perform this step Note Once you put the two LUNs in the same disk group you have an empty disk eroup that you can delete Add the services to the group that has the quorum disk on the first server a On both servers stop each of the three services Configuration Service Startup Configuration Service Monitor and Configuration Service Server and set them to manual
79. to be entered into the Edit Server window of the console software Choose File Server List Setup Move the server name from the Managed Servers list to the Available Servers list The Edit Server window is displayed This window shows the server name and the IP address as it was configured Select the name of the server in the Available Servers list and click Edit The Edit Server window is displayed This window shows the server name and the IP address as it was configured If the network address has changed click Get IP Addr by Name The program searches for and displays the correct IP address if you provided the name of the server as it is recorded by the service used by your network Otherwise you must type the IP address If the name used for the server is not the same as the server s network name or if the naming service is not yet updated you have to type the IP address manually Once the server IP address is entered click OK to specify the changed address and go back to the Server List Setup window Move the server name back to the Managed Servers list Click OK to leave the Server List Setup window Appendix F Troubleshooting 261 Symptom Traps are not received from a server To troubleshoot why a trap from a server is not received on an SNMP management workstation such as HP OpenView use the following steps 1 Make sure that the SNMP service has been started on the server Verify that s
80. to scan Media Scan Serer 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Ch 0 Id 40 SUM StorEdge 3510 A A SM OO09s26 Logical Drives Disks Capacity Media Scan SEAGATE ST336753FSUNS6G 34732 MB In Progress SEAGATE STSS675SFSUNSEG 34732 ME Mo Progress SEAGATE STSS675SFSUNS8G 34732 MB Mo Progress SEAGATE STSS675SFSUNS8G 34732 MB Mo Progress SEAGATE STSS6752FSUNS8G 34732 MB In Progress SEAGATE STSS675SFSUNS8G 34732 ME Mo Progress Media Scan Priority Normal teration Count Single Time Run Media Scan Cancel Help 4 Select a Media Scan Priority Low Media scan is not performed until other tasks have been completed Normal Media scan is typically performed within three seconds Improved Media scan is typically performed within one second High Media scan is performed immediately 5 Select an Iteration Count to specify whether the physical drives are to be checked one time or continuously Single time is the default value 6 Click Run Media Scan and click OK to continue Note If a media scan is already running the Run Media Scan button is unavailable 134 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 7 Click Close on the Starting Array Administration window The scan progress is displayed in the Controller Array Progress window Controller Array Progress Serer 206 6 181 121 tech2 Controller SUN StorEdge 3310 A A SN 007725 disk o 0 Media
81. window 89 RAID controller parameters 90 terminology overview 209 View Controller Configuration command 87 RAID levels assigning to logical drive 42 RAID 0 215 RAID 1 216 RAID 1 0 217 RAID 3 218 RAID 5 219 range of disks logical drives supported 214 random I O optimization stripe size 42 53 152 187 rebuild drive manually 138 failed drive 136 standby drive automatic 136 Rebuild Priority 189 Rebuild window 139 rebuilding drive without standby 137 red device status item 77 Redundancy tab 194 196 Redundant Deassert Reset field 195 201 Redundant Force Pri Fail field 195 Redundant Force Sec Fail field 195 Report icon 9 report option 114 117 Reset button 263 alarm state box 96 reset button silencing failed component alarms 96 View Enclosure window 96 resetting 318 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 controller 143 restoring logical drive configuration 140 restoring a logical drive configuration 140 RS 232 tab 184 RST_OID MIB file 246 262 S SAF TE email notification of event messages 15 SAF TE SES Polling Period s field 191 Save Configuration function 30 63 Save Configuration window 30 save controller parameter changes 180 save logical drive configuration 62 Save Report command 114 Save Report File window 114 Saveset Description tab 141 saving logical drive configuration 29 scanning drives 89 170 schedu
82. wrong or empty SMTP From address format is wrong SMTP Server address is empty Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 295 TABLE G 33 Error Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Specify how often you want the parity checked Standard Configuration options provide a group of basic default RAID sets whereby the drive size quantity and assignments are preconfigured Standard Configuration will replace the existing configuration Standard Host LUN mapping created successfully Standard Host LUN mapping deleted successfully Standard maps are available to all connected hosts in certain configurations Standby rebuild operation completed with an unknown error Standby rebuild operation in progress Startup state of the secondary controller State Change Mutex lock is not released Sun StorEdge Configuration Service monitor daemon has started Sun StorEdge Configuration Service server daemon has started Sun StorEdge Configuration Service startup is complete Sun StorEdge Configuration Service trap daemon has started System Administrator ssconfig has started irrevocable System Shutdown and Restart SAVE all data and LOG OFF IMMEDIATELY System ID is empty Tape operation has stopped because an error occurred while reading or writing data which the drive cannot correct TapeAlert notification Device Channel Target Target Media Error Reported Ch d Id d Likely poorly seated or defective drive Possib
83. 0 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide To determine whether or not media scan is running see the event log For more information on the event log window see Event Log Window on page 112 For more information about media scan see To Scan Physical Disks for Bad Blocks Media Scan on page 132 v To Use Custom Configuration Custom Configuration gives you multiple choices for configuring or reconfiguring logical drives with varying RAID levels It also gives you the option of adding newly created logical drives to logical volumes 1 Log in as an ssconfig user 2 Select the array that you want to configure 3 Choose Configuration Custom Configure 44 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 The Custom Configuration Options window is displayed l Custom Configuration Options Sewer 206 656 181 212 techtest Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SM 8009328 Select an Operation Mew Configuration Add LOLs to the Current Configuration Dynamically Grow and or Reconfigure LOs L S Make or Change Standby Drives Change Host LUN Assignments change Controller Parameters Manage Existing LOs s and Faritions Configure Web Serer m New Configuration Configures new logical drives with varying RAID levels and other RAID parameters and enables you to add the new logical drives to logical volumes The New Configuration command erases the previous configuration on an array con
84. 0007338 lt a Status Manufacturer Model Size Fibre Channel array disk 0 1 Good SEAGATE ST336607LS 34732 MB 3JA1C2E600007339 A disk 0 2 Global S SEAGATE ST336607LS 34732 MB 3JA22Z0A00007351 disk 0 3 Good SEAGATE ST336607LS 34732 MB 3JA230NL00007351 Scan SCSI Drive is not displayed for the Sun StorEdge Identify Drive On changes the drive LED to amber 2 351 0 Fibre Channel Identify Drive Off changes the drive LED back to green array Identify Drive On The Physical Drives tab lists the physical drives associated with the array To see details about any of the physical drives listed double click the drive or select the drive and click View The View Physical Drive window is displayed For more information about View Physical Drive see View Physical Drive on page 94 88 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 Scan SCSI Drive For the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array and the Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array if a drive fails the Scan SCSI Drive button is displayed A SCSI hard drive can be scanned in and made available without having to shut down the array Identify Drive On To identify a single physical drive for example if you are receiving errors on a specific channel ID and you need to determine which drive is causing the errors select the drive from the list and click Identify Drive On The selected drive s LED changes to amber and the but
85. 010 ins fas ci All Hosts Server 206 235 238 67 falcon discovery completed v To Remove Standard Host Mapping Before you can assign a LUN filter you have to remove the standard host mapping indicated by an M label 4 from the array Standard mapping enables all hosts to see all standard mapped logical drives LUN filtering restricts the mapping to specific host s 1 From the main window click the Filter View tab 2 From the right pane click each All Hosts item and drag and drop it to Storage Pools 3 Click Yes to the warning message A confirmation message is displayed 4 Click Close When you return to the Filter View tab note that the M label E has been removed from the logical drive Chapter 5 LUN Filtering FC and SATA Only 71 v To Assign a LUN Filter After you remove the standard mapping you are ready to assign a LUN filter by mapping logical drives to hosts 1 From the main window click the Filter View tab 2 Select a logical drive under Storage Pools and drag and drop it to the appropriate A warning message is displayed Note If the HBA device connected to the array is not known drag and drop the logical drive to the host server in the left pane The program prompts you to filter the array for each HBA device in the host When this happens the logical drive is visible to the HBA device on the host but it is not visible or accessible to any other HBA device 3
86. 1 SATA array a degraded state might indicate that the battery has expired See Battery Information on page 103 for more information about the battery Device Capacities Sun StorEdge Configuration Service windows often present the capacity of devices such as logical drives All device capacity is displayed in powers of 1024 1 Kbyte 1024 bytes 1 Mbyte 1024 Kbyte 1 048 576 bytes 1 Gbyte 1024 Mbyte 1 073 741 824 bytes 1 Tbyte 1024 Gbyte 1 099 511 627 776 bytes Online Help To access online help choose Help Contents The online help is in HTML format and depending on the OS can be run through Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator It includes information about major functions within the program Tree View of Product Configurations For each server or group of servers devices in the tree view are arranged in a hierarchical order with the server or group at the top followed by the array controllers How the remaining devices logical drives physical drives and enclosures are shown might vary slightly depending on which array and controller are being displayed This section provides window views that might be depicted in the tree view Groups A group is a logical collection of servers within the device tree This new data object enables multiple servers to be contained under a single category The group object s34 looks and behaves like all tree objects It has an iconic represen
87. 35 238 104 f104 Select disks for Logical Drive New Configuration Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8000568 LD Ch ID Capacity Manufacture Model none 2 1 44rb ME SEHLHIE Slb 2r SUNSbLb 34476 ME SEAGATE 34476 MB SEAGATE none 2 3 none 2 5 1336752F SUN3S6G 1336752F SUNS6G Logical Drive 0 Definition Remove Disk Capacity 34476 MB Add Disk Hake Standby Max Drive Size MB 2000 RAID Level LY Definition LD o F Commit L Part Definition LDG Total 1 Part Part Size Part size 0 68952 MB As logical drives are added to the logical volume they are displayed in the LV Definition box Available Size displays the total capacity of all 34476 MB 34476 MB nee disks which is the total 0 D 5 Available Size MB 68952 logical volume size Part Size MB 68952 New LD Add to LY LD 0 Map _ On line Initialization Channel Host Ch 0 lt FC bd Stripe Size 128 KB Defaul v ID PID 40 v 3 disk using 1093428 MB Write a new label to the new LD 3 4 write Policy Defaultevrite back x Add Partition Commit Cancel Help To create another logical drive to add to the logical volume click New LD Create the logical drive and add it to the logical volume by clicking Add to LV Repeat this step for every logical drive you want to add to the logical volu
88. 4 Select the device to be used Label the device if prompted Ol Type the word partition to view the existing partition table After typing partition you must type print to view the existing partition table 6 Edit the partition table as necessary and label it if changes are made 7 Create file systems on the partitions using the newfs command 8 Mount the file systems by using the mount command or by editing etc vfstab and using the mountall command v To Create Windows 2000 and Windows 2003 Host Partitions The following steps are general guidelines for detailed information refer to your Windows 2000 and Windows 2003 documentation 1 For Windows 2000 choose Start Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools Computer Management Disk Management For Windows 2003 choose Start Administrative Tools Computer Management Disk Management Make sure you can see the new drives marked by the disk icon amp under Disk Management 2 Right click the disk for which you want to write a signature and select Write Signature 44 MB Unallocated 3 Select the disk for which you want to create a partition and click OK J Disk Unknown 44 MB Online Right click the disk for which you want to write a signature 32 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Right click the drive where the drive capacity is shown and select Create Partit
89. 6337 Manufacturer SUN Firmware Rev 0406 0406 Modal StorEdge 3511F Package PLD Rew 1000 1000 Power On Time JN Enclosure Number x Alarm State NoAlarm G SATA Router Info EncliD EnclSN Ch Slot Rew Fi Boot R CSB Rey Hi Rev ST Rev 006874 2 Upper DPOSS5a 0548 050011 0552 006874 3 Lower DPOSSSa 0548 11 0552 Battery Information Note The Battery Information window does not apply to the Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array or the Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array In the event of a power failure the battery maintains power to the cache for 72 hours When power is restored the data in cache is dumped to disk For the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array Sun StorEdge Configuration Service monitors the usable life of the battery and displays its status in the Battery Information window The program calculates the battery expiration date using the battery type manufacture date and in service date which have been programmed at the factory Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 103 Note For a battery FRU you need to verify the in service date so that Sun StorEdge Configuration Service can set it as explained in To Verify the In Service Date When Replacing a Battery on page 105 The enclosure icon on the main window displays a degraded yellow status 21 days before the battery is going to expire The enclosure icon also displays a warning yellow status if the
90. AIDS 103 BETE GOO Go Ss ors Hears PAB _ assgrment Status gize i LOO iO ritti anod 103430 Me s oe e LO 1 2 1 4 set n Good 1000 ME t e a cols a al of J m a sfescreseefanool cosal coos af of ee Ee a Delete kj DK Cancel Help wee fe e e e The LD field in the Manage Existing LDs LVs and Partitions window right is dynamic it changes when logical drives are created deleted In this example LD2 was deleted and LD4 became LD3 and LD 2 became LD1 In the terminal menu option View and Edit Logical Drives left the LG field is not dynamic an empty slot indicates that LD2 was deleted Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 159 10 11 12 13 To Create a Partition Note Before you can create a partition you need to unmap all assigned LUNs Select the array that contains the logical drive s you want to partition View the logical drive s you want to create partition s on If any of these logical drives have host LUN assignments proceed to Step 4 if they do not proceed to Step 8 Choose Configuration Custom Configure Select Change Host LUN Assignments Select the Host LUN s that are attached to the logical drive s you want to partition and click Unmap Host LUN Click OK and then click Close Choose Configuration Custom Configure Select Manage Existing LDs LVs and Partitions from the Cust
91. BA as shown in the following example A SAF TE limitation prevents the main window from showing the drives connected to port A and port B The program can only monitor the JBOD from the server connected to port B as shown in the following example Sun StorEdge TM Configuration Service Console File View Configuration Array Administration Help Main View D 206 235 236 602 harrier o GA HBA Card C Ch 0 Id 14 SEAGATE ST373307LSUN726 70007 ME 8 Ch 0 14 15 SEAGATE ST373307LSUN72G 70007 MB nice Ch 0 K 6 SUN StorEdge 3120 D Note In a split bus configuration if each port is connected to different servers the program can only monitor the JBOD from the server connected to port B 224 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 v To View Component and Alarm Characteristics The View Enclosure window displays the component and alarm characteristics of a JBOD When a JBOD is in a state that requires attention a device status state symbol is displayed on the JBOD device in the main window See Device Status on page 77 for a description of the symbols 1 Select the enclosure icon 4 for the Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array 2 Choose View View Enclosure To display FRU ID information click View FRU View Enclosure Server Server 1 Controller HBA Card 1 Manufacturer SUM Fimware Rey O84 Model storEdge 3310 4 Package Rev TH Power On Time M A Battery Backup Mo
92. BM AIX OS Java Plug in software versions earlier than 1 3 are not supported Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 123 124 Microsoft Windows OS TABLE 6 8 Minimum Web Browser Requirements for Microsoft Windows OS Web Browser Java Plug in Internet Explorer 4 0 Java Plug in 1 2 2 Netscape Navigator 4 79 Java Plug in 1 2 2 Mozilla 2 1 Java Plug in 1 2 Setting Up the Array Although the entire Sun StorEdge Configuration Service package isn t required to be loaded on the machine that is going to be used to access the array from the web a few program files are needed therefore the entire Sun StorEdge Configuration Service package must be installed on another server so you can transfer files from it to the array The following procedure describes how to conveniently transfer the necessary files to set up web management Make sure you have an Ethernet connection from the network to the array and you have established an IP address for it From the server that has the entire Sun StorEdge Configuration Service package installed choose Configuration Custom Configure Select Configure Web Server Verify the IP address of the managing agent which is the agent that is running on the server directly connected to the storage Enter the IP address of the array where the files are going to be transferred and click OK Note By default there is no password set for the array If you have created one using the firmware ap
93. CSI Array Power Supply and Fan Location 99 Sun StorEdge 3510 FC Array and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA Array Power Supply and Fan Location 99 In Band Management 118 Out of Band Management 118 Copying and Replacing Physical Drives 168 Logical Drive Including Multiple Physical Drives 210 Allocation of Drives in Logical Drive Configurations 211 Partitions in Logical Drive Configurations 212 Mapping Partitions to Host ID LUNs 213 Mapping Partitions to LUNs Under an ID 213 RAID 0 Configuration 215 RAID 1 Configuration 216 RAID 1 0 Configuration 217 RAID 3 Configuration 218 RAID 5 Configuration 219 Local Dedicated Spare 221 Global Spare 221 Mixing Local and Global Spares 222 xvii FIGURE B 1 Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI Array Power Supply and Fan Location 226 FIGURE E 1 Object Identifier of a MIB Variable 249 xviii Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 Preface This guide explains how to use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service to configure monitor and manage the Sun StorEdge 3000 family arrays For information about installing Sun StorEdge Configuration Service refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Installation Guide This guide also references Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter a companion utility of Sun StorEdge Configuration Service used for sending and receiving system messages from the hosts and arrays For information about installing Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter refer to t
94. Configuration 59 Note Host LUNs are automatically mapped after logical drives have completed the initialization process v To Log Out of the Configuration Level When you have finished with configuration activities log back in to the monitoring level of the program 1 Choose File Logout 2 Select Logout to monitoring mode and click OK Host LUN Assignments For the server to recognize a logical drive logical volume it must first be mapped to a host channel ID When a logical drive logical volume is mapped to a host channel ID it becomes a logical unit number LUN The following section describes how to map a logical drive logical volume to a host channel and how to remove it Note When logical drives logical volumes are first created unless Do Not Map is selected the host LUNs are automatically mapped after logical drives logical volumes have completed the initialization process Note Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI arrays and Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI arrays support a maximum of 128 LUN assignments Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA arrays support a maximum of 1024 LUN assignments maximum number of LUNs assigned to each host ID is 32 Note Some versions of operating system software or utilities might not display all mapped LUNs if there is no partition or logical drive mapped to LUN 0 Map a partition or logical drive to LUN 0 if you are in doubt or refer to your operating system documentati
95. Drive State TABLE G 4 Error Field 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A System Drive State Errors Offline Degraded Online Unknown Parity Check Reconstruction Reconfiguration Dynamic Growth Nonexistent Initialization Error Field Disk State TABLE G 5 Error Field 01 02 03 04 05 Disk State Errors Description Offline Degraded Online Unknown SMART 270 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 TABLE G 5 Error Field 06 07 08 Disk State Errors Continued Description Dead Statechanged Disklistchanged Error Field SAF TE State TABLE G 6 Error Field 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B OC SAF TE State Errors Description Power Fan Thermal Alarm Locked Slot Unknown Unable to get SAF TE information Battery Invalid Number of Slots Environmental Data Not Available Incompatible revision Error Field Tape State TABLE G 7 Error Field 01 02 03 04 Tape State Errors Description Read Write Hard Error Media Error Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 271 TABLE G 7 Error Field 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B OC OD 14 15 16 1E 1F 20 21 22 28 29 2A 2B C8 C9 Tape State Errors Continued Description Read Failure Write Failure Media Life Not Upgradable Write Protect Nonremoval Cleaning Media Unsupported Format Snapped Tape Clean Now Clean Periodic Expired Cleaning Media H
96. Fault Report Fault Thread Fault Lock Fault System Fault 276 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 Error Field Communication Link TABLE G 18 Communications Link Error Field Description 01 Socket Fault Error Field Communications Async TABLE G 19 Communications Async Error Field Description 01 Socket Fault 02 Thread Fault 03 Cold Link Fault 04 Send Event Fault Error Field Communications Security TABLE G 20 Communications Security Error Field Description 01 Security Violation Error Field Timeout TABLE G 21 Timeout Errors Error Field Description 01 Configuration Update 02 Lock Timeout Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 277 Error Field Administration TABLE G 22 Administration Errors Error Field 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B OE OF 10 11 12 13 14 16 18 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F Description Set Customer Name Fault Set Configuration Ended Initialize Initialize Ended Rebuild Rebuild Ended Parity Check Parity Check Ended Set SAF TE Slot State Set SAF TE Perform Slot Set SAF TE Send Global Schedule Parity Check Schedule Parity Check Ended Set Controller Parameters Firmware Download Consistency Check or Rebuild Ended Controller Reset Expand a Logical Drive Add disk drives to a Logical Drive Copy and replace a disk drive Background command finished Background command aborted Create label for the disks star
97. Installing the Software 3 Example Screens 3 Superuser Privileges 4 Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI Array 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family JBODs 4 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 5 Starting Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 6 v To Start Sun StorEdge Configuration Service on a UNIX Host 6 v To Start Sun StorEdge Configuration Service on a Microsoft Windows Host 7 The Main Window 7 The Menu Toolbar and Tabs 7 Menu Bar 8 Toolbar 8 Tabs 10 Device Icons 10 Physical Hard Drives 10 Navigating 10 If Console Locks Up During Use 11 v To Stop Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 11 Setup Procedures 11 v v v v v v To Add Servers 12 To Delete Servers 18 To Log In and Out 19 To Assign a Server to Manage a Controller 21 Changing a Server Assignment 22 To Unassign the Managing Server 24 v To Manually Delete a Server Using the Terminal Window 24 To Configure Agent Parameters 24 v To Enable JBOD Support 26 To Verify Storage Configurations 27 To Save the Logical Drive Configuration 29 Creating Host Partitions 31 v v v v To Create Solaris Host Partitions 31 To Create Windows 2000 and Windows 2003 Host Partitions 32 To Create IBM AIX Host Logical Volumes 33 To Create HP UX Host Logical Volumes 34 What to Do Next 35 4 Full Configuration 37 Configuring Logical Drives and Logical Volumes 38 Logical Drives 38 Logical Volumes 38 iv Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Ser
98. LUNs are required in this configuration m A load balanced cluster where some LUNs are maintained on one server and some LUNs are maintained on the other server Both servers process data at the same time but they are processing I O on different LUNs 233 A minimum of three LUNs must be defined This enables one small LUN to be established for quorum disk use and a large LUN to be used on each server in the cluster The quorum disk maintains the cluster configuration data necessary to recover the cluster in the event of a server failure Cluster Configuration Requirements When you are installing the MSCS software identify the disk to be used for the quorum disk which maintains cluster information In a cluster configuration the program runs on only one server at a time the server that has the quorum disk If the server running with Sun StorEdge Configuration Service malfunctions the Cluster Administrator automatically changes the first server s disk load to the second server and start the services on that server In a two server cluster configuration the cluster itself with its own IP address becomes the managed server on the Managed Servers list Add the cluster to the Managed Servers list as the last step in setting up the cluster v To Set Up Cluster Configuration Following is an overview of the steps needed to set up an array in a cluster configuration with two host servers 1 Set up the servers a Set up the
99. Latency This function sets the delay time before the controller tries to access the hard drives after power on The default is 15 seconds 4 Set the Tag Count Per drive This is the maximum number of tags that can be sent to each drive at the same time A drive has a built in cache that is used to sort all of the I O requests tags that are sent to the drive enabling the drive to finish the requests faster The cache size and maximum number of tags varies between different brands and models of drive Use the default setting of 32 Changing the maximum tag count to Disable causes the internal cache of the drive to be ignored not used The controller supports tag command queuing with an adjustable tag count from 1 to 128 5 Select the variable time options shown in the list box from the SAF TE SES Polling Period s field or select Disabled to disable this function so that all installed Event Recording Modules ERMs are never polled If there are remote devices in your RAID enclosure monitored by SAF TE or SES use this function to determine the interval after which the controller checks the status of those devices 6 From the SCSI I O Timeout s field select from 0 5 through 30 seconds The SCSI I O Timeout is the time interval for the controller to wait for a drive to respond If the controller attempts to read data from or write data to a drive but the drive does not respond within the SCSI I O timeout value the drive is cons
100. M 00727 LD 2 ID 4Dse84ac Initializing Abon 1 Close v To Check Parity Parity checking is the process where the integrity of redundant data on fault tolerant logical drives RAID 1 3 and 5 is checked Depending on which options you select the parity can be overwritten and any error reported as an event 1 Select the logical drive on which you want to run parity check 2 Choose Array Administration Parity Check Note You need to be logged in as either ssadmin or ssconfig to access options on this menu 128 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 3 When the Logical Drive Parity Check window is displayed select the logical drive on which you want to run a parity check Logical Drive Parity Check E E X Server 127 0 0 1 localhost Controller Ch 0 Id 1 SUN StorEdge 3510 4 4 SM 3341331 Rebuild priority Low Logical Drives LO Status Size MB Write Policy Good 2000 5 Defaulttvyvrit 3 2 Good j139rss 1 Detaultiyyrit 3 Operate Options C Regenerate i Generate Error Event To run a parity check on multiple drives choose the Array Administration gt Schedule Parity Check command to schedule a parity check to be run in the near future such as within three minutes When scheduled parity check runs it automatically performs the parity checks one after another 4 Select from the following options m Regenerate For RAID 3 and 5 config
101. MB are equal A single logical drive is considered to be a single partition Note Mixing SATA and FC disks to create a logical drive is not supported 50 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 New Configuration Server 206 235 238 104 F104 Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8000568 Select disks for Logical Drive LY 0 Definition LD Ch ID Capacity Manufacture Model LD none gg 3 IE 57336752FSU0NS66 A none 2 3 34476 MB SEAGATE ST336752FSUNZ6G z l l l none 2 5 34476 MB SEAGATE ST336752FSUNZ6G m Max Drive Size displays the total capacity of each Add Disk Hake Standby disk Logical Drive 0 Definition Part Definition LDG Total Fart Max Drive Size MB ee ae 34476 0 103428 MB i i Ch ID Capacity Available Size displays apacity 2 0 34476 MB iiaii the total capacity of all epee Oo Available Size MB 103428 disks which is the total 2 4 34476 MB logical drive size Part Size MB 103428 New LD Add to LY LD 0 Map _ On line Initialization Channel Host Ch 0 lt FC Stripe Size 128 KB Default x ID PID 40 v 3 disk using 103428 MB Write Policy Default VVrite back w Write a new label to the new LD Commit Cancel Help 9 Select the RAID Level For this example select RAID Level 5 This RAID level applies to all disks in this logical drive In this
102. Mar 1 2003 Jan 22 2004 Jan 22 2006 v To Verify the In Service Date When Replacing a Battery When Sun StorEdge Configuration Service detects a battery FRU the enclosure icon displays a degraded yellow status symbol as shown in the following example Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 105 Sun StorEdge TM Configuration Service File View Configuration Array Administration Help Main View Filter View Efa 206 235 238 80 nighthauk o EEP ch 0 Id 1 SUN StorEdge 3510 A A Array SN 003652 Q TE Out of Band Ch 0 Id 0 SUN StorEdge 3510 A A Array SN 0043E6 Secondary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8002663 Array Ch 2 Id 6 SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 34732 MB Array Ch 2 Id 7 SEAGATE ST336753FSUNS6G 34732 MB Array Ch 2 Id 8 SEAGATE ST336753FSUNS6G 34732 MB Array Ch 2 Id 9 SEAGATE ST336753FSUNS6G 34732 MB Array Ch 2 3 Id 10 SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 34732 MB Array Ch 2 Id 11 SEAGATE ST336753FSUN36G 34732 MB gt Id 12 SUN StorEdge 3510F A Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8008583 Logical Drive 0 1F70D914F RAID 418506 MB 1 Double click the enclosure icon Sun StorEdge Configuration Service calculates the battery expiration date using the in service date date that the battery is put into service which is based on the host clock The program prompts you to verify the date by displaying the following message E warning Sun StorEdgetTM Configuration Service has detected a new b
103. Minimum value 5 Minutes O Disabled Interval oftrap generation for an eventin Secs D one trap for an event Minimum 60 Secs O Only one trap per event Timeout of heartbeat lost in Minutes Defaultis 15 Acceptable Range 1 to 30 Minutes im Enable SMART Monitoring Enable JBOD support Controller Primary Agent Information IP Address 206 6 181 213 206 6 181 213 55632 Socket Port 58632 Add Controller password Remove Verity password Ol QutorBand Agent preferred over In Band For Monitoring Frequency type the interval time in seconds that you want to poll for status This value is the interval between successive polling for any status change of devices controllers and enclosure monitoring by the agent The default value is 60 seconds If you want the console to update more frequently with device status changes decrease this value Note Increasing the polling interval could negatively impact error messaging under heavy I O load For Periodic Device Discovery Time type the value in minutes you want to check for new devices The periodic device discovery value is used to determine how often each device ID is scanned for a new device The default value of 0 specifies not to scan for new devices Note that device IDs are scanned less frequently as the numerical value increases Conversely device IDs are scanned more frequently as the numerical value decreases Five minutes is the
104. S The following steps describe how to discover the replaced drive on systems running the IBM AIX OS Note You must have superuser privileges to run the commands necessary to replace a failed drive 1 Create the logical drive and map its LUN to the correct host channel 2 Run the command cfgmgr Appendix B Monitoring JBODs 229 3 Run the command aswe Output similar to the following is displayed hdisk0 000d 50dd520b2e rootvg hdisk1 000d 50d928c3c98 None hdisk1 000d 50d928c3c98 None 4 If any of the drives show none you need to assign a Physical Volume IDENTIFIER 5 Run the command smitty a Select Devices b Select Fixed Disk c Select Change Show Characteristics of a Disk d Select the disk without a PVID e Select ASSIGN physical volume identifier press Tab once to display Yes for the value and press Return f Press Return again to confirm and repeat Step a Step f as necessary 6 From the smitty main menu select System Storage Management Physical amp Logical Storage Logical Volume Manager Volume Groups Add a Volume Group 7 Specify a name for the volume group make sure the partitions for the journaled file system are large enough and select the Physical Volume Name s 8 From the smitty main menu select System Storage Management Physical amp Logical Storage File Systems Add Change Show Delete File Systems gt Enhanced Jour
105. S event log In addition when the event occurs on a server and that server is set up to send traps to an SNMP enterprise management console such as HP OpenView the server agent also sends a trap message to that computer Depending on the event received the console might initiate a refresh process to request the inventory from the last periodic scan of the server involved so the console can update the server s inventory on the main window During this refresh process the satellite dish icon is attached to the server icon and you cannot perform any configuration and array activity commands on that server until the process is completed and the main window is updated Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 109 Event Log File The Event Log window displays up to 500 events at a time If there are more than 500 events only the most recent 500 are displayed in the Event Log window However Sun StorEdge Configuration Service does not delete any events from the Event Log file eventlog txt until more than 10 000 events have been logged a After 10 000 events the program reduces the Event Log file to the most current 500 events and then accumulates events until the limit of 10 000 is exceeded again m The fields of each event record are separated by a semi colon so you can easily import the file into a database m eventlog txt is located in the directory where the console program files are installed Note If the event log appears not to
106. SDRAM 15 Chars Max ache Size Controller Unique ID a 003CE3 Append File ID 331D3 3510 5406F C Controller Reset C Mute Beeper Channel RS232 Cache DiskArray Drive I F HostiF Redundancy Peripheral Network Protocol Chl MAC Address Static IP Address NetM askiGateway Dynamic IP Dynamic IP Address Net 6 OO CO FF 00 3C E3 206 6 181 213 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 Disable Change Settings OK Cancel Help 198 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 1 To manually configure an IP address subnet mask or gateway address click Change Settings The Change Network Setting window is displayed Change Network Settings Physical Channel Mo E Current Transfer Speed 100M vatatic IP Information Dynamic IP Information IP Address IP Address 206 235 256 163 Subnet hlask subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Gateway 206 235 235 1 w Enable Dynamic IP Assignment MAC Address Information roupported IP Assignment Mechanisms MAC Address O0 CO FF 00 10 8F p Transfer Speed Information Dynamic IP Assignment Mechanism List as l l Supported Selected f RARP ssa DHCP Transter Speeds To Negotiate Remove Note Sun StorEdge 3000 Family arrays are configured by default with the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP TCP IP network support protocol enabled If your network uses a DHCP server the server assigns an IP address netmask and gateway IP addr
107. SEAGATE Good SEAGATE Global S SEAGATE Good SEAGATE Identity Drive On STS3660FL5 STS3660FL8 ST S3660FL8 STS3660FL5 Identity Drive On changes the drive LED to amber Identity Drive Of changes the drive LED back to green S4732 ME SJATBI2ZPO000 7336 S4732 ME SJATCZERBODOO0F S39 A agra MB 3JA22Z0A0000735 S4732 MB SJA2SO0NLOO00F S51 Scan SCS Drive Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 171 4 Select the correct Channel and ID that the drive was input on Input Channel IO Please selectthe ChanneliD of which you wantto scan Channel If the scan was successful the drive is appropriately displayed in the main window and made available v To Download RAID Controller Firmware The following procedures are used to upgrade the controller firmware for both a single and redundant controller configuration 1 Select the controller 2 Choose Array Administration Controller Maintenance 3 If you are not already logged in as ssconfig a password prompt is displayed type the ssconfig password 172 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 The Controller Maintenance Options window is displayed Controller Maintenance Options Serer 206 6 181 121 tech2 Controller Ch 0 Id 40 SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8009328 lect an Operation ag Download Firmware Download Firmware with Boot Record Reset the Controller Shut Down the Contro
108. SM e009S28 Controller Information Firmware version 4 310 Boot Record version 1 37H Serial Number 80043228 CPL Type PRG si Controller Mame Cache Size 1024MB ECC SDRAM 15 Chars Max i Controller Unique ID OOaCeES Append File ID 43103 3510 5406F Hex format O Not Defined jooscea AB _ Controller Reset _ Mute Beeper Channel RS 232 Cache Disk Array Drive KF Host lF Redundancy Feripheral Network Protocol Controller Failure Enable T Battery Backup Unit Failure or Not Fully Charged Enable T 7 Fan Failure Enable w Temperature Exceeds Threshold Enable T es Power Supply Failure Enable w Temperature Exceeds Threshold Period 30 min T i Feripheral Device Status device name value into status CPU Temp Sensor 5873 00t Over Upper threshold 2 Enable or disable event trigger operations If the array is configured with write back cache enabled specify whether you want the write policy to dynamically switch from write back cache to write through cache when the following events occur Controller Failure m Fan Failure m Power Supply Failure m Battery Backup Unit failure or Battery Not Fully Charged Note Once the problem is corrected the original write policy is restored If you do not want the write policy to be switched dynamically set these options to Disable They are enabled by default For more information about write back and write through see To Add a Logical Drive or Logical Volume Fr
109. TECH FC Cache Size 1024MB ECC SDRAM Controller Unique ID OO04DE2 Append File ID 411B 3510 8415F Channel RS 232 Cache Disk Array Drive IF Host liF i Redundancy Peripheral Network Protocol Chi LogChi Mode Type PID SID DefCik DeftWid Term CurCik CurWid Host D FIBRE NIA Auto Serial NA 1 0GHz Serial 216000COFFS804DE 1 NIA Serial Auto Serial 226000COFFA04D 2 Serial 2 0GHz Serial 3 i Serial 2 0GHz Serial 4 Serial 2 0GHz Serial 256000COFFCO4D 5 Auto Serial 266000COFFE04D 4 Channel Parameters Each controller has an RS 232 port and an Ethernet port This architecture ensures continuous communication should one controller fail Since the communication is established to only one controller at a time even when the array is in redundant mode the CurClk and CurWid parameters are displayed for the primary controller Therefore if a user maps one LUN to the primary controller and another LUN to a secondary controller only the established connection to the primary controller is displayed through the serial and Ethernet port menu As a result if a primary ID is not mapped to a channel and a secondary ID is mapped Async is displayed in the CurClk field View Primary Secondary Controller Configuration View Primary and View Secondary Controller Configuration windows display the characteristics of the controller that is selected in the main window To display the pr
110. View Controller Parameters 90 View Logical Drive 93 View Physical Drive 94 View Enclosure 95 Environmental State 96 Power Supply and Fan Location 98 SAF TE and SES Temperature Sensor Locations 100 SES Voltage Sensors 101 vi Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 SATA MUX and SATA Router Information 102 Battery Information 103 v To Verify the In Service Date When Replacing a Battery 105 View FRU 107 Array Administration Progress 108 Agent Options Management 108 Event Log 109 Event Log File 110 v To Filter Events 111 v To Write Events to a Log File for an IBM AIX Host 111 Event Log Window 112 Severity Levels 113 Save Report 114 View Report 117 In Band and Out of Band Storage Management 117 v To Use Out of Band Management 119 v To Remove an Array From Out of Band Management 122 Managing Storage Through the Web 123 Web Browser Requirements 123 UNIX OS 123 Microsoft Windows OS 124 Setting Up the Array 124 v To Access the Console From the Web Browser 125 7 Maintaining the Array 127 Array Administration Activities 128 v ToCheck Parity 128 v To Schedule a Parity Check 130 v To Scan Physical Disks for Bad Blocks Media Scan 132 Contents vii v To Stop a Media Scan on a Logical Drive or Physical Drive 135 Failed Drives 136 v v v v v To Automatically Rebuild a Drive Using a Standby Drive 136 To Rebuild a Device Without a Standby Drive 137 To Check the Progress of the
111. al minutes for the discovery process to finish However if you choose not to use the Auto Discovery option on startup the servers icons are white indicating that there is currently no information available for these servers In this case you need to double click each server icon and specify the appropriate monitoring password You can also choose File Login Once the password is specified for a server the discovery process begins to perform an inventory on the selected server Note If you need a very secure environment where access to server inventory data is restricted select No for Auto Discovery see Select or Deselect Automatic Discovery of servers on page 14 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Viewing Detailed Device Information Sun StorEdge Configuration Service provides detailed information about each agent or server and about the array devices that are connected to it The fields on each of these views vary depending on the capabilities of the disk controller Except for Save Report and View Report which are located under the File menu the commands and windows described in this section are accessed through the View menu View Group View Server View HBA Card View Controller View Logical Drive View Physical Drive View Enclosure View FRU Array Administration Progress Agent Options Management Save Report View Report View Group View Gr
112. and the Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array to maintain large Fibre Channel networks that share common storage Topics covered in this chapter include m Overview on page 65 a Assigning a LUN Filter on page 67 To Access the LUN Filter View on page 67 To Add a New Host Manually on page 67 To Add an HBA Device Manually on page 69 To Remove Standard Host Mapping on page 71 To Assign a LUN Filter on page 72 To Delete a LUN Filter on page 74 Overview An important part of effectively maintaining a storage infrastructure depends on how accessible and secure the data is at all times With LUN filtering support Sun StorEdge Configuration Service provides a utility for secure centralized storage access Management For multiple servers connected to the same FC array LUN filtering provides a proprietary path from a host server to a logical drive and essentially hides or excludes the other connected servers from seeing or accessing the same logical drive That is the LUN filter organizes how the FC array devices are accessed and viewed from host devices and typically maps a FC array device to only one host so that other hosts do not access and use the same FC array device 65 LUN filtering also enables multiple logical drives to be mapped to the same LUN enabling different servers to have their own LUN 0 to boot from if needed LUN filtering is also valuable in clarifying mapping when each host b
113. apacity limitation of your OS before using Standard Configuration Chapter 4 Full Configuration 39 40 Caution Back up any existing data to an external device before using Standard Configuration Standard Configuration overwrites any existing logical drive configuration When the existing logical drive configuration is overwritten all data is effectively erased Log in as an ssconfig user Select the array that you want to configure Determine whether the optimization mode of the logical drive is to be Sequential I O default or Random I O The optimization mode you select determines the maximum number of disks you can include in an array and the maximum usable capacity of a logical drive total array capacity and cache block size Optimization is set in the Cache tab of the Change Controller Parameters window and is set to Sequential by default For more information on Sequential I O and Random I O and for steps on how to change the optimization mode see Cache Tab on page 185 Choose Configuration Standard Configure A Standard Configuration Warning message is displayed Click OK to continue Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 The Standard Configuration Options window is displayed If you are not currently logged in as ssconfig a login dialog is displayed Standard Configuration Options Server 206 235 238 64 storm Controller Primary SUN StorEd
114. aps through an interface to an SNMP trap daemon called sstrapd By default this daemon does not start automatically during the boot process The following steps describe how to enable trap processing 1 Create the file var opt SUNWsscs ssagent sstrapd conf using any standard text editor This file contains the name or the IP address of the SNMP manager console or consoles If there is more than one console list them on separate lines 2 Edit the file etc init d ssagent and remove the comment marks from the SNMP related start section These lines are marked by an initial double hash mark 3 Save the file after these edits The sstrapd daemon starts at the next boot or can be started immediately by running the following command etc init d ssagent uptrap This starts the sstrapd daemon as well as the other two daemons if they are not currently running Only one instance of each daemon is running at this point whether or not any daemons were previously running v To Set Up a Linux Host For a Linux host you can generate SNMP version 1 traps through an interface to an SNMP trap daemon called sstrapd By default this daemon does not start automatically during the boot process The following steps describe how to enable trap processing 1 Create the file var opt SUNWsscs ssagent sstrapd conf using any standard text editor This file must be created with a list of either system names or IP addresses one per line for th
115. arameters on page 24 108 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Event Log The console receives logs and displays events generated by managed servers and by the console itself The majority of the events are generated by the agents on the managed servers and occur when there are m Status changes on any device on a managed server including the server itself because of device failure malfunction or disconnection m Inventory changes addition or removal of devices Configuration changes initial configuration setup and subsequent configuration changes m Array processes running on the server initialization parity checking rebuilding Although array processes are initiated by the console it is the server agent that generates operation notification events after these processes start on the server For details about full event monitoring and email notification capabilities including sending email messages to a specified list when errors occur see Email and SNMP on page 245 The console generates a much smaller number of events For example it generates an event if it does not receive a certain number of consecutive heartbeats from a managed server When the console receives any event it logs it in to the Event Log file eventlog txt and displays it in the Event Log window Also if the event occurs on a server the notification of the event is sent to that server s O
116. ard scalable network of storage devices and servers providing accelerated data access SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface An industry standard for connecting disk and tape devices to a workstation SES An interface to SCSI Enclosure Services devices These devices sense and monitor physical conditions within an enclosure and enable access to the status reporting and configuration features of the enclosure such as indicator LEDs on the enclosure SID Secondary controller identifier number SMART Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology The industry standard reliability prediction indicator for both the IDE ATA and SCSI hard disk drives Hard disk drives with SMART offer early warning of some hard disk failures so critical data can be protected SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A protocol for sending email messages between servers and from mail clients to mail servers The messages can then be retrieved with an email client using either POP or IMAP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol A set of protocols for managing complex networks SNMP works by sending messages called protocol data units PDUs to different parts of a network SNMP compliant devices called agents store data about themselves in Management Information Bases MIBs and return this data to the SNMP requesters spanning Making use of the firmware s striping capability to stripe data across two otherwise independent RAID logical drives The tw
117. ardware A Hardware B Interface Eject Media Down Load Fail Loader Hardware A Loader Tray Tape Loader Hardware B Loader Door Query Log Failed Inquire Tape Failed 272 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 Error Field Redundancy State TABLEG 8 Redundancy State Errors Error Field Description 01 Mode OK 02 No Memory for Negotiation 03 Secondary Failure 04 Secondary Removed 05 Detected Removal of Secondary 06 Detected Insertion of Secondary 07 Primary Failure 08 Primary Removed 09 Detected Removal of Primary 0A Detected Insertion of Primary 0B Unknown State 0C Partner Failed OD Partner Inserted OE Partner Removed Error Field Internal State TABLE G 9 Internal State Errors Error Field Description 01 No Memory 02 Semaphore 03 Thread 04 No Devices Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 273 Error Field Device State TABLE G 10 Device State Errors Error Field Description 01 Inquiry 02 Unknown Error Field Initialization State TABLE G 11 Initialization State Errors Error Field Description 01 dll Initializing 02 dll Initializing Failed Error Field Invalid Client Parameter TABLE G 12 Client Parameter Errors Error Field Description 01 Set Configuration Configuration Miscompare 02 Set Configuration Configuration Device Invalid 03 Set Configuration Enquire Miscompare 04 Set Configuration Enquire2 Miscompare 05 Incorrect Application
118. ardware problems without interrupting the array s data availability often by using backup systems brought online when a failure is detected Many arrays provide fault tolerance by using RAID architecture to give protection against loss of data when a single disk drive fails Using RAID 1 mirroring RAID 3 or RAID 5 striping with parity or RAID 1 0 mirroring and striping techniques the array controller can reconstruct data from a failed drive and write it to a standby or replacement drive A logical drive that provides protection of data in the event of a single drive failure by employing RAID 1 1 0 3 or 5 Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop FC AL is implemented as either a loop or a Fabric A loop can contain up to 126 nodes accessible through only one or two servers A cost effective gigabit communications link deployed across a wide range of hardware Fibre channel adapters of a host computer server or workstation Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Fibre hubs FRU Gbyte GBIC global spare group HBA hot spare hot swappable ID initialization JBOD LAN LD logical drive An Arbitrated Loop Hub is a wiring concentrator Arbitrated means that all nodes communicating over this Fibre loop are sharing a 100 Mbyte sec segment Whenever more devices are added to a single segment the bandwidth available to each node is further divided A loop configurati
119. are revision for FC and SATA arrays in the Firmware Rev field Located on the I O module the SAF TE and SES processors monitor environmental conditions If one or more of the environmental components is not working but the array is still functional the enclosure array and server icons in the main window display a yellow degraded device status symbol If the result of one or more components not working places the array in a critical state the enclosure array and server icons in the main window display a red critical device status symbol The device status symbol corresponds to the overall environmental status that is displayed in the Summary section of the View Enclosure window Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 The Component Status list reports the status of individual components which might not always correspond to the overall status of the array For example if power supply 0 is pulled from the array the yellow device symbol for degraded is displayed in the main window because the array is still functioning using power supply 1 Sun StorEdgel TM Configuration Service Console File dew Configuration Aray Administration Help Main ew He HEN D Eh 206 235 230 100 nightvision D EEA CCh O Id 4 SUN StorEdge 3314 A A Array SN OQOF TS Array Ch 0 Id 14 SUN StorEdge 3410 Ge rm Primary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 351S5665 rm Secondary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN OO0151
120. at Choose Array Administration Controller Maintenance If you are not already logged in as ssconfig a password prompt is displayed type the ssconfig password The Controller Maintenance Options window is displayed Click Performance Statistics The Performance Statistics window is displayed Chapter 7 Maintaining the Array 145 Note The Performance Statistics window displays information for the active controller only Performance Statistics Server 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8009328 Cache Hits Performance Sustained Read Write Performance Cache Hits Average Readivyrite Average MB s 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cache Hits History Read rite History MBis 100 40 v To Get Controller Boot Time To provide you with a point of reference when investigating controller events you can determine when the controller was last powered up or reset 1 Choose Array Administration Controller Maintenance 2 If you are not already logged in as ssconfig a password prompt is displayed type the ssconfig password The Controller Maintenance Options window is displayed 146 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Click Get Controller Boot Time The Controller Boot Time window is displayed The controller date time and time zone are set using the firmware application Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide
121. attery To calculate the battery expiration date the in service date which is based on the clock of host xoceosox needs to be verified Todays date is Jan 22 2004 Is this the correct date 106 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 2 If the host clock is correct click Yes The following confirmation message is displayed Click OK Battery fi The in service date is Jan 22 2004 Sun StorEdge Configuration Service sets the in service date and displays the date in the In Service Date field in the Battery Information window 3 If the host clock is incorrect click No and reset the clock so that Sun StorEdge Configuration Service can prompt you to verify it again and set the in service date Caution If you do not reset and verify the in service date Sun StorEdge Configuration Service cannot accurately calculate the battery expiration date View FRU A FRU is a field replaceable unit It is a part used to assemble a new system or to repair a system in the field The Sun FRU ID field replaceable unit identification program is a Sun solution for capturing transmitting and analyzing FRU specific configuration diagnosis and failure information residing on the FRU Choose View View FRU to display the FRU IDs and information for all FRUs in the array including Serial Number Model Description Vendor ID Time time the FRU was programmed and Location Chapter 6 Moni
122. ay be down Make sure the services are running at the server 1 UNIX OS Run the following command ps e grep ss The names ssmon and ssserver should both be present in the output If they are not proceed to Step 2 If they are proceed to Step 4 Windows 2000 Choose Start Programs Administrative Tools Computer Management Click Services amp Applications Services and verify that SUNWscsd Monitor SUNWscsd Server and SUNWscsd Startup services are started If they are not proceed to Step 2 If they are proceed to Step 4 Windows 2003 Choose Start Administrative Tools Computer Management Services amp Applications Services and verify that SUNWscsd Monitor SUNWscsd Server and SUNWscsd Startup services are started If they are not proceed to Step 2 If they are proceed to Step 4 2 UNIX OS Stop and start the daemons as explained in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Installation Guide Microsoft Windows Stop and start the services by right clicking the service you want to start or stop 3 If the daemons services do not stop start properly do a reconfiguration reboot 4 Make sure that the TCP IP protocol software is loaded and that the network card and the network connection are working To test the TCP IP connectivity at the command line type ping IP address of the server or the server name If you do not get a reply there is a problem in the TCP IP protocol services Co
123. block striping block striping with dedicated parity caching A pair of components such as storage controllers in a failure tolerant RAID array that share a task or set of tasks when both are functioning normally When one component of the pair fails the other takes the entire load Dual active controllers are connected to the same set of devices and provide a combination of higher I O performance and greater failure tolerance than a single controller American National Standards Institute Address Resolution Protocol A process in which data is automatically reconstructed after a drive failure and written to a standby spare drive An automatic rebuild also occurs when a new drive is installed manually in place of a failed drive If the rebuild process is interrupted by a reset use the Manual Rebuild command from the firmware application to restart the rebuilding process See striping RAID 3 A technique that breaks data into logical blocks the size of a disk block and then stripes these blocks across several drives One drive is dedicated to parity In the event that a disk fails the original data can be reconstructed using the parity information and the information on the remaining drives Allows data to be stored in a predesignated area of a disk or RAM random access memory Caching is used to speed up the operation of RAID arrays disk drives computers and servers or other peripheral devices 305 capacity CH
124. cache the controller writes the data to the disk drive before signaling the host OS that the process is complete Write through cache has lower write operation and throughput performance than write back cache but it is the safer strategy with minimum risk of data loss on power failure Because a battery module is installed power is supplied to the data cached in memory and the data can be written to disk when power is restored Using write back cache the controller receives the data to write to disk stores it in the memory buffer and immediately sends the host OS a signal that the write operation is complete before the data is actually written to the disk drive Write back caching improves the performance of write operations and the throughput of the controller card Write back cache is enabled by default Note The setting you specify in the Write Back field on the Cache tab of the Change Controller Parameters window is the default global cache setting for all logical drives See Cache Tab on page 185 m Default Write through or Write back Assigns the global write policy that is specified in the Write Back field of the Cache Tab on the Change Controller Parameters window If the global setting for write policy is changed automatically changes the write policy for this logical drive The array can be configured to dynamically switch write policy from write back cache to write through cache if specified events occur Write
125. cal drives and logical volumes this number is insignificant to the controller That is the controller does not report on the logical drives or logical volumes according to this number For example if four logical drives exist and LD2 is deleted the existing LD3 dynamically changes to LD2 and LD4 changes to LD3 Only the LD LV number changes all LUN mapping and data on the logical drives remains unchanged Because the controller reports on the total number of logical drives which in this case is three the actual LD LV number as displayed in the LD LV field is irrelevant In this example if a new logical drive is created it takes the LD number of the logical drive that was deleted and the controller reports that there are a total of four logical drives All existing logical drives return to their original primary secondary designation Note As shown in the following example the LG number on the firmware terminal menu option View and Edit Logical Drives is not visually dynamic After a logical drive is deleted you see an empty placeholder When a logical drive is created from the console or from the terminal this empty placeholder is filled with the new logical drive iz EE EE SEL a ey ce er ioe eae a ee wed Eee er teat 2 ee oe ft eee Fe Server 20623623870 ME2e2 Controller Primary SUM StorEdge 2310 SN LDsvs Partitions PEES sizetre stane Tol Ln jase jar Pi EEA E CSBBSB INAI R
126. can monitor and manage up to 32 arrays at one time However console response time can decrease as the number of arrays increases 1 Make sure all directly attached servers were added following the directions in To Add Servers on page 12 This ensures that all Host names are present under Controller Assignments 2 From the main window choose Array Administration Controller Assignment The Assign Server to Manage a RAID Controller window is displayed 3 Select the controller that you want to manage Chapter 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 21 4 Select a server from the Server to manage this controller list and click Apply This enables the selected server to manage an array controller It also disables all other servers listed from managing the same array Assign Server to Manage a RAID Controller A Sun StorEdge 3000 family controller can only be managed by one host at a time This function enables you to assign a server to manage the controller that has a host LUN on a LD L assigned to the primary controller Controller Serial Number List Unique ID Primary SN Secondary Enabled Server Disabled Server 000001 725 6550 techtest 003ce3 8009328 8009200 techtest Select Server for Managing Controller Unique ID 000001 Controller SN 7725 6550 Server to manage this controller techtest gt Apply Close Help 5 Click Close to close the view As
127. ckup of data Various combinations of these features are described by defined RAID levels Arrays can support RAID 0 1 1 0 3 and 5 Various techniques using combinations of mirroring striping duplexing and parity to implement a RAID array are called RAID levels Each technique uses a distinct algorithm to offer a mix of performance reliability and cost Reverse Address Resolution Protocol Reliability Availability and Serviceability A variety of features and initiatives all designed to maximize equipment uptime and mean time between failures minimize downtime and the length of time necessary to repair failures and eliminate or decrease single points of failure in favor of redundancy A storage device parameter that determines whether the storage device holds data in cache before storing it to disk The ability to hold data in cache while it is being written to disk can increase storage device speed during sequential reads The process of reconstructing the data that was on a disk before it failed Rebuilding can be done only in arrays with data redundancy such as RAID levels 1 1 0 3 and 5 Enables the RAID controller to serve other I O requests while rebuilding the logical drives Priority ranges from low which uses the controller s minimum resources to rebuild to high which uses the controller s maximum resources to complete the rebuilding process Glossary 309 SAN Storage Area Network A high speed open stand
128. closure where the controller is located and on the configuration of the peripherals To bring the information for another tab into view click the tab Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 87 Controllers Tab To access this window double click the array icon in the main window or select it and choose View View Controller Then click the Controller tab The Controller tab lists the controllers To view more information about the controllers double click the controller or select the controller and click View Depending on whether the controller is primary or secondary the View Primary or View Secondary Controller Configuration window is displayed See View Primary Secondary Controller Configuration on page 90 Physical Drives Tab To access this window double click the array icon in the main window or select it and choose View View Controller and then click the Physical Drives tab The following example shows the View Controller Configuration window with the Physical Drives tab displayed ep View Controller Configuration i Server 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Ch 0 Id 0 SUN StorEdge 3310 A A SN 007725 Status Good A A State Details Active A A State Active Total Physical Drives 10 Global Write Policy Write back View FRU View Controller Params View FRU Is not displayed for the Controllers Physical Drives Enclosure Info 3 Sun StorEdge 3510 Good SEAGATE ST336607LS 34732MB 3JA1BJ2P0
129. contain all of the events from the managed array close and reopen the console The events from the agent are logged into the system log of the host where the agent is installed even if the console is not running The following table lists the locations where the events are logged to in each OS TABLE 6 5 Event Log Location OS Event Log Location Solaris OS var adm messages Also shown on the console Linux OS var log messages Microsoft Windows OS The application log of the system which can be viewed using Event Viewer You can also read the event log directly from the file Program Files Sun sscs eventlog txt HP UX OS var adm syslog syslog log 110 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 To Filter Events Sun StorEdge Configuration Service generates event log entries for three severity levels informational warning and critical All three types are marked as Error in the log file If you want to limit your event monitoring to critical events only you can do so by editing the etc init d ssagent file Modify etc init d ssagent as follows After the line start add the following two lines SSCS_SUPPORT_MESSAGELEVELS 1 export SSCS_SUPPORT_MESSAGELEVELS Stop and restart the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service agent etc init d ssagent stop etc init d ssagent start To Write Events to a Log File for an IBM AIX Host For an IBM AIX OS the event logs are
130. ctions are also provided for manually starting a rebuild after a drive failure Caution Be sure to configure a local or global standby drive for each logical drive at the time of initial configuration Depending on the type of RAID level used and archiving procedure implemented significant data loss might occur in cases of single or multiple drive failures Additionally make tested spare drives readily available on site for immediate replacement if a malfunction occurs v To Automatically Rebuild a Drive Using a Standby Drive When a drive associated with a fault tolerant logical drive fails and a standby drive has previously been installed and configured as either a global or local spare the failed drive is automatically substituted and its data rebuilt using the designated spare drive For this to occur flawlessly the spare drive s capacity must always be equivalent to or larger than the failed drive that is being replaced The rebuilding process normally starts within one to two minutes It is performed in the background and takes approximately eight minutes per Gbyte when there is no other activity on the controller During the automatic rebuild process normal activity might continue although performance might degrade The degree to which performance degrades is determined by the rebuild priority set for the controller To change the rebuild priority see Disk Array Tab on page 189 The progress of the rebuild process i
131. d Firmware downloaded to SAF TE SES device Ch d Id d failed Firmware downloaded to SAF TE SES device Ch d Id d successfully Firmware downloaded to SCSI drive Ch d Id d failed Firmware downloaded to SCSI drive Ch d Id d successfully First select one Logical Drive First select one physical device First select one RAID controller For RAID1 Logical Drive Add Drive Copy and Replace function is disabled Forward mail canceled by user Generic File Mutex lock is not released Get logical drive list failure Getting Agent Options failed Getting Controller Parameters failed Getting Host LUN Assignments failed Please try again Getting the configuration failed Group Name can not be empty Host LUN filter Entry created successfully Host LUN filter Entry deleted successfully Host LUNs modified successfully If file access is not properly coordinated when assigned to multiple hosts data corruption and access contentions may occur If Minimum interval is O or then Content must be Event If the firmware download progress is interrupted the controllers devices may become unusable Initialization has completed on logical drive LogicalDrive Initialization has started on logical drive LogicalDrive Initialization on logical drive LogicalDrive has been aborted Initialization operations have completed Initialization rebuild expand or add SCSI drive activities are in progress Tr
132. d Drives 176 v To Upgrade Firmware on SAF TE SES Devices 177 v To Change Controller Parameters 179 v To Save Changed Values 180 Channel Tab 182 RS 232 Tab 184 Cache Tab 185 Disk Array Tab 189 Drive I F Tab 190 Host I F Tab 192 Redundancy Tab 194 Peripheral Tab 195 v To View Environmental Status for the Controller 197 Network Tab 198 Protocol Tab 200 v To Mute the Controller Beeper 201 v To Assign or Change Standby Drives 202 Available Servers 204 v To Edit a Server Entry 204 Updating the Object Data Manager on an IBM AIX Host 206 v To Update the ODM 206 Contents ix A RAID Basics 209 RAID Terminology Overview 209 Logical Drive 210 Logical Volume 210 Local Spare Drive 210 Global Spare Drive 210 Channels 211 RAID Levels 214 RAIDO 215 RAID 1 216 RAID 1 0 217 RAID3 218 RAID5 219 Advanced RAID Levels 220 Local and Global Spare Drives 220 Having Both Local and Global Spares 222 B Monitoring JBODs 223 v To Enable JBOD Support 223 v To View Component and Alarm Characteristics 225 Environmental State 225 Power Supply and Fan Location 226 SAF TE Temperature Sensor Locations 226 To Download Firmware for Devices 227 To Discover a Drive 227 Solaris OS 227 Linux OS 228 x Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Microsoft Windows OS 228 HP UX OS 229 IBM AIX OS 229 Using the Cluster Configuration SCSI Only 233 Planning the Cluster Configuration 233 Cluster Configuration Requirement
133. d TCP IP communication Cannot connect with the incoming connection Cannot create a communication session for the incoming connection Cannot create host LUN filter no host IDs were selected Cannot create standard host LUN mapping no host IDs were selected Cannot find the logical drive that was just created It may have been aborted Cannot get configuration from controller The operation is canceled Cannot get configuration in set configuration Cannot listen on the opened TCP IP communication Cannot lock a resource Cannot open TCP IP communication Cannot perform IOCTL on the TCP IP communication Cannot query incoming data status of the connection Cannot receive data from the connected client Cannot report status Cannot send data to the connected client Change logical drive failure Change logical volume failure Change or set local global standby drives successful Changes made to Optimization will NOT take effect until all the logical drives are deleted and then the controller is RESET Click View to select one file Close transport fail at set configuration Collect mail canceled by user Communication is reestablished with controller 288 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 TABLE G 33 Error Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Configuration information saved successfully Connect and Login command error Contact Fax number format is wrong Con
134. d do not work in those configurations Use logical drives instead For more information see Logical Volumes on page 38 Note If the logical drive is going to be larger than 253 Gbyte see To Prepare for Logical Drives Larger Than 253 Gbyte on page 49 1 Select the array that you want to configure 2 Choose Configuration Custom Configure Note This selection is inactive unless you have selected an array with available physical drives 3 Select Add LDs LVs to the Current Configuration from the Custom Configuration Options window 4 Verify that the server and controller displayed at the top of the window are correct 5 Select a disk you want to be included in the new logical drive and click Add Disk If you make a mistake or change your mind select the drive and click Remove Disk 150 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 6 10 Select a RAID Level For definitions of RAID levels see RAID Basics on page 209 Select the Host channel and ID to which you would like the new logical drive to be mapped to from the Channel and the ID list boxes Set the Max Drive Size The Max Drive Size displays the total capacity of each disk A smaller logical drive can be created by decreasing this value Note If you do not change the Max Drive Size but you do change the Partition Size a new partition is created at the specified partition size The r
135. dia Check on Physical drive d d has been aborted Memory Allocation Error Unable to load daemon Minimum interval between emails must be one of the following formats Vov Non nn mm 292 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 TABLE G 33 Error Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Minimum interval can t meet Content value Minimum interval format error Minimum interval format is HH MM Minimum interval is empty Monitor Stopped Multiple IP assignment mechanisms are not supported Select only one mechanism Mute beeper Mute controller beeper failure Mute controller beeper Mutex Lock is not released Mutex Lock timeouts Mutex Lock s cannot be created Mutex Lock s change state failed New parity check schedule has been created No admin progress exists No Admin progress was found All activity should be complete No array administration activity in progress No more events to report No new controller was found you do not need to reboot the system No online server cannot delete event log No rebuildable drive available Only the last partition of a LD LV can be deleted Open transport fail at set configuration Open transport Lock fail the original lock holder s IP address is s Open transport LogIn fail Operation completed successfully Operation failed Operation in progress Operation on one of the servers
136. drive Obtain the correct firmware and try again The Host LUN filter map StorEdge SN d LD d Partition d WWN has been created The Host LUN filter map StorEdge SN d LD d Partition d WWN has been deleted The in service date s of new battery on Ch d_ Id d is set The IP Address cannot be empty The last cleaning cartridge used in the tape drive has worn out Discard the worn out cleaning cartridge wait for the current operation to finish and then use a new cleaning cartridge The LD is moved up after you delete the LD so it may not be consistent with the LD shown in the RS 232 terminal window The length of the Encrypt Key must be greater than 8 characters The Mail Server field cannot be empty The media has exceeded its specified life The memory allocation Failed The mount point drive letter cannot be written into file registry The new battery on Ch d Id d is installed Battery information is s The number of logical drives did not increase after creating a logical drive before d now d Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 297 TABLE G 33 Error Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages The operation failed because the autoloader door is open Clear any obstructions from the autoloader door eject the magazine and then insert it again If the fault does not clear turn the autoloader off and then on again The operation failed because the tape in the drive has snapped Disca
137. due to the requirements of another application installed on your system etc system already contains statements assigning values to any of these kernel parameters you need to merge the parameter assignments shown in Step 1 into the file so that each parameter is only assigned once If a previous parameter value is different than one specified in Step 1 specify the larger value Reboot the server Symptom The console does not show changes when hardware is added or replaced If you add new equipment or if you replace a failed device such as a disk drive tape drive power supply or fan the console does not always show updated information At times the tree view and the other views associated with it do not reflect the actual status of a device If a new device is added and you want this device to be recognized before the next periodic scan click Rescan in the Server View window The server immediately rescans for the inventory and the console updates its server inventory and present the result of any changes in the tree view To ensure a timely inventory do a manual scan You might have to click Rescan more than once When the server is in the process of a rescan and the console sends a request for the inventory the server sends the console the server inventory at its last update because it has not yet finished the current scan Symptom Logical drive is not present on a Solaris host If the logical drive is not being displayed
138. dules MA Power On Cycles MiA Enclosure Humber Alarm State No Alarm Environmental State Summa Component Y Power Supply 0 Power Online Power Supply 1 s GB Fan 0 SS Fars Online a Fan 1 Thermal Online Be Fan 2 Se Fan 3 Environmental State The Environmental State section of the View Enclosure window reports the status of power supplies fans and temperature It provides an overall environmental status of the array as well as the status of the individual components For a description of the Component Status list see Environmental State on page 96 Appendix B Monitoring JBODs 225 Power Supply and Fan Location The following illustration identifies the location of the power supplies and fans in the Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array Front of array Right side P Power supply 1 Y F S Left side Fan 0 FIGURE B 1 Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI Array Power Supply and Fan Location SAF TE Temperature Sensor Locations Monitoring temperature at different points within the array is one of the most important SAF TE functions High temperatures can cause significant damage if they go unnoticed There are a number of different sensors at key points in the enclosure The following table shows the location of each of those sensors which corresponds to the Temperature displayed in the View Enclosure Component Status list TABLE B 1 Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI Array SAF TE Temperature
139. e Battery Information on page 103 for general battery information and see To Verify the In Service Date When Replacing a Battery on page 105 for information about the in service date Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family FRU Installation Guide for details on installing a replacement battery Critical State Reasons for which a device might be placed in a critical state include but are not limited to the following m Depending on the size of the logical drive and the number of physical drives it contains a logical drive that has one or more failed physical drives can be operating in a critical state See View Logical Drive on page 93 to determine the status of the logical drive and the status of the physical drives that make up the logical drive m If two or more of the environmental components including power supplies fans and temperature is not working for example three fans fail or two power supplies fail the enclosure array and server icons indicate a critical state See View Enclosure on page 95 for more information m If a controller device exceeds or does not meet the threshold range that was set using the firmware application the controller icon indicates a critical state See To View Environmental Status for the Controller on page 197 for more information 78 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 m For the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 351
140. e Updating the Configuration on page 149 1 Make sure the server icon is online that is the server symbol is purple 2 Observe the main window and check the storage configuration 3 If you have multiple managed servers select the server you want to check If the server icon is not purple determine the server s state see TABLE 6 1 If the server s icon has a satellite dish attached to it Ef the server might be in the discovery process and is available after a short delay 4 Click the container symbol that appears to the left of the server whose storage you want to check The program graphically displays each controller connected to the server as shown in the following figure Sun StorEdge TM Configuration Service File View Configuration Array Administration Help iain view Filter iew 206 255 236 352 B52 EEP Ch 0 Id 0 SUN StorEdge 3310 A A Array SN 123456 La i Secondary SUH StorEdge 3310 5N 555555 E me Primary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 666666 Chapter 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 27 5 To see other details click the container symbol next to the controller whose storage you want to check If the array has not yet been configured no logical drives LUNs for controllers are displayed If the array has been fully configured the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service displays its associated devices It looks similar to the devices displayed in the follow
141. e configuration commands and all aspects of the program Note In the event that one of these usernames is already in use either modify the existing username use one of the other Sun StorEdge Configuration Service usernames or combine the two roles For more information on setting up users and passwords refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Installation Guide Note See Step 4d under To Add Servers on page 12 for information on how to set up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service so that monitoring does not require the ssmon password Chapter 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 19 20 1 To log in choose File Login and type the assigned password for the specified level of security If the ssmon password was specified when the server was added you do not have to log in to monitor the server If the ssmon password was not specified when the server was added whenever the console starts up you need to log in as ssmon to monitor the server Server Login Serer 206 235 2368 70 Es000 Login name ssmon Password mo o cere ae _ Maintain continuous access only as the monitoring user When you select a command that requires the administration or configuration level a login dialog box is displayed and you log into that level with the appropriate password After completing your activity log out To log out choose File Logout When you log out from the ad
142. e grayed depending on what resources are available in the main window Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLE 3 1 Icon Main Window Toolbar Icons Description Server List Setup Adds servers that the console manages edits server information or designates that an available server is managed View Event Log View events such as storage device status changes hardware status changes or operational notifications Save Event Log Displays the Save Event Log File dialog box which enables you to conveniently save the Event Log without having to go to the Event Log window Delete Event Log Manually deletes the contents of the eventlog txt file The program accumulates events until the limit of 10 000 is reached at which time the Event Log is automatically reduced to the most current 500 events Save Report Creates an XML file containing data about each of the storage components on the selected server as of the current date Standard Configure Creates one or more logical drives with one RAID level on the selected array controller Use when you want a predefined configuration where Sun StorEdge Configuration Service automatically configures storage Custom Configure Provides multiple choices for configuring or reconfiguring logical drives or logical volumes with varying RAID levels on the selected array controller Use when you want to manually define configuratio
143. e R5232 Port Settings R8232 Port No 0 Current Baud Rate 36400 Mew Baud Rate 2400 F Ok Cancel 4 Click OK 184 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Cache Tab 1 From the Change Controller Parameters window select the Cache tab Change Controller Parameters Serer 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Primary SUM StorEdge 3310 SN 00 725 Controller Information Firmware Yersion 4116 Boot Record Version 1 315 Serial Number T25 CPL Type PEG rol Controller Name l 14 Chars Maw Cache Size 512MB ECC SDRAM o Sn i Hex format 0 Not Defines 20446 Append File ID 411G 3310 54245 _ Controller Reset Mute Beeper Channel Disk Array Drive WF Host IF Redundancy Peripheral Wetwork Protocol Write Back Cache Enabled Default T Cache Size 512MB Optimization Sequential VOiDefault 7 Memon Type ECC SDRAM Periodic Cache Flush Time Disabled Default 2 To specify write back as the default cache click the Write Back Cache list box and select Enabled The write policy determines when cached data is written to the disk drives The ability to hold data in cache while it is being written to disk can increase storage device speed during sequential reads Write policy options include write through and write back Using write back cache the controller receives the data to write to disk stores it in the memory buffer and immediately sends the host OS a signal
144. e SNMP manager consoles The file can contain blank lines and comment lines 2 Edit the file etc init d ssagent and remove the comment marks from the SNMP related start section These lines are marked by an initial double hash mark 256 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 Save the file after these edits The sstrapd daemon starts at the next boot or can be started immediately by running the following command etc init d ssagent uptrap This starts the sstrapd daemon as well as the other two daemons if they are not currently running Only one instance of each daemon is running at this point whether or not any daemons were previously running To Set Up an HP UX Host Create the file var opt SUNWsscs ssagent sstrapd conf using any standard text editor This file must be created with a list of either system names or IP addresses one per line for the SNMP manager consoles The file can contain blank lines and comment lines Edit the file sbin init d ssagent using any standard text editor Change the following line Look at environment variable from etc rc config d ssagent to see if we should start SNMP trap daemon sstrapd if SSSTRAPD 1 then P trap daemon sstrapd Look at environment variable from etc rc config d ssagent to see if we should start SNMP trap daemon sstrapd if SSSTRAPD O then P trap daemon sstrapd Save the file after these ed
145. e capacity of 1 Gbyte This combination of drives appears to the system as a single logical drive Note RAID 1 does not allow expansion RAID levels 3 and 5 permit expansion by adding drives to an existing array Logical drive Physical disks Ba Block 6 j Block 8 FIGURE A 7 RAID 1 Configuration In addition to the data protection that RAID 1 provides this RAID level also improves performance In cases where multiple concurrent I O is occurring that I O can be distributed between disk copies thus reducing total effective data access time 216 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 RAID 1 0 RAID 1 0 combines RAID 0 and RAID 1 to offer mirroring and disk striping Using RAID 1 0 is a time saving feature that enables you to configure a large number of disks for mirroring in one step It is not a standard RAID level option that you can select it does not appear in the list of RAID level options supported by the controller If four or more disk drives are chosen for a RAID 1 logical drive RAID 1 0 is performed automatically Z Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 a Block 7 Block 8 Physical disks Logical drive i i FIGURE A 8 RAID 1 0 Configuration Appendix A RAID Basics 217 RAID 3 RAID 3 implements block striping with dedicated parity This RAID level breaks data into logical blocks the size of a disk block and th
146. e driver and provides a list of the devices connected to the adapter Sun StorEdge Configuration Service channels start with number 0 The server listed at the top of the window is the server in which the HBA is installed View HBA Card Server 206 235 238 65 SUNblade Host Bus Adapter HBA Card 2 Status Online Driver pe O SUNVY fasa So00000 H Devices Status Manufacturer Serial Lynx R 0 110 Online Sun StorEdge MA 3179746 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 View Controller View Controller displays the components that make up the array To access View Controller double click the array icon g in the main window or select it and choose View View Controller The View Controller Configuration window is displayed peal View Contraller Configuration Po Server 206 6 181 212 techtest Node name 206000COFFOO3CE3 Controller Ch O Id 40 SUN StorEdge 3510 A A SN 8009328 Status Good A A State Details Active A A State Active Total Physical Drives T Global Write Policy Vvrite back View Controller Params Controllers Physical Drives Enclosure Info Cotl Status Manufacturer Driver Fiy Revy Total Fats Cache Size D Good SUN StorEdge 3510 4 136 1 1024 Good SUN StorEdge 3510 4 136 0 1024 The tabs at the bottom section of the window provide detailed information about the RAID controller s LUNs on the physical drives attached to it on the en
147. e either the command line smit or smitty to make sure that any previously created volume groups have been varied off and that no file systems are mounted on the device s It might also be necessary to perform an exportvg function on persistent volume groups If exportvg does not work try rebooting 2 If using a JBOD run the same command for generic devices which can be determined from the results returned from running the following command Isdev Cc generic 3 Run the following commands 206 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 usr bin ksh93 for i 1 i lt 20 i do rmdev 1 gscS i d done 4 Delete references in the dev directory by running the command rm dev gsc 5 Stop and start the agent and reread the system configuration into the ODM by running the following commands ssagent stop ssagent start cfgmgr v Caution Depending on the number of devices present in the OS this command might take several minutes to complete Do not make any configuration changes until cfgmgr has completed Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 207 208 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 APPENDIX A RAID Basics This appendix provides background information about RAID including an overview of RAID terminology and RAID levels Topics covered include the following m RAID Terminology Overview on page 209 m
148. e intervention by the network administrator such as the failure of a device power supply or fan m Warning Warning messages generally indicate internal program events However if you see a large number of these messages it might mean that there is a problem with the server or the network m Informational A message about the devices on the server that does not require intervention by the network administrator You receive alarm forwarding for the level selected and any other levels of a higher severity Thus if you choose Informational you are also notified of all alarm conditions However if you choose Critical only Critical alarms are received For further information about messages see Troubleshooting on page 259 Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 113 save Report The Save Report option creates an XML file containing all the information available to the program about a specific array 1 Choose File Save Report The Exportable to spreadsheets option enables you to save the report with delimiters Comma Semicolon Tab Colon and Vertical Bar for export to spreadsheets Save Report Selected Server 206 235 238 65 SUBblade Report Type Detailed suitable for printing 3 Exportable to spreadsheets Repont Coverage Selected server only 3 All online servers Save report Cancel 2 Select Save report The Save Report File window is displayed Save Report File Loo
149. e is partitioned it cannot be added to a logical volume To create multiple partitions of the same size click Add Partition as many times as partitions you want to create You can also type the partition size in the Part Size field and multiply it by the number of partitions you want to create for example 100 128 Any remaining Mbyte is added to the last partition As you add partitions the remaining capacity displayed in Available Size MB decreases by the amount of the partition size As shown in the following example of the original 4000 Mbyte 1000 Mbyte was allocated to Partition 0 The remaining 3000 Mbyte is then automatically moved to Partition 1 The remaining usable capacity is displayed in the Available Size MB field Chapter 4 Full Configuration 55 Server 206 235 238 104 104 New Configuration Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8000568 Select disks for Logical Drive 2 5 34476 MB 2 5 34476 MB SEAGATE SEAGATE Hodel 57336752FS0NS66 1336752F SUNS6G 1336752F SUNS6G Logical Drive 0 Definition Remove Disk Ch ID Capacity 2 0 34476 MB 2 2 34476 MB 2 4 34476 MB 3 disk using 103428 MB Add Disk Hake Standby Max Drive Size MB 2000 RAID Level 30 New LD Add to LY _ On line Initialization Stripe Size 428 KB Default Write Policy DefaulttWrite back v Write a new label to the new LD LY Defi
150. e server in the Server name field and press Return The Server name identifies the server If this name is in your network s name server database Sun StorEdge Configuration Service determines the server s IP address and displays it in the IP Address field If the program cannot find an IP address for the name the name was either typed incorrectly or has not been recorded in the server s name database Chapter 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 13 14 c If required type the server s TCP IP address in the IP Address field Storage management can be enabled in band using fibre channel or SCSI host connections or out of band through the Ethernet port For details on using TCP IP for out of band management see In Band and Out of Band Storage Management on page 117 If the program has not already displayed the IP address as described in the previous step type the IP address manually Selecting Get IP Address by Name located below the IP Address field is another method of having the program search for the IP address and display it automatically As mentioned in the previous step it works only if your network has a name server database and you have typed the server name as it is recorded in the database Otherwise you must type the IP address manually Optional To set up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service so that a password is not required to monitor the server type the ssmon password tha
151. e storage after each two minute interval m 5 min Flushes cache to logical drive storage after each five minute interval 10 min Flushes cache to logical drive storage after each 10 minute interval Note Setting this value to an interval less than one minute Continuous Sync or 30 sec might affect performance 5 For changes to take effect reset the controller 188 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Disk Array Tab 1 From the Change Controller Parameters window select the Disk Array tab Server 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Information Firmware Yersion 4 11E Serial Number 8009328 Change Controller Parameters Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8009328 Controller Name TECH FC 15 Chars Max Controller Unique ID O04DE2 Hex format O Not Defined Boot Record Version 1 31H CPU Type PPC 50 Cache Size 1024MB ECC SDRAM Append File ID 411E 3510 S421F _ Controller Reset _ Mute Beeper Channel i RS 232 Cache Disk array Drive IF i Host I F Redundancy i Peripheral Network Protocol Write Verify on Initialization Write Verify on Rebuild Write Verify On Normal Rebuild Priority Disabled Default Disabled Default Disabled Default This method affects write performance during normal use Low Defaulf 2 Select either Disabled or Enabled from the t
152. eferred method of storage management If the out of band configuration is removed the program reverts to in band storage and monitoring after you start restart the services Agent Options Management Server 206 235 238 527 B52 Monitoring Frequency in Secs Folling Time Acceptable Range 6to 1200 Secs 60 Periodic Device Discovery Time in Minutes i to disable Minimum Yalue 5 Minutes Disabled Interval of trap generation for an eventin secs i0 one trap for an event Minimum 60 Secs DOnt one trap per event Timeout of heartbeat lost in Minutes Defaultis 15 Acceptable Range 1 to 30 Minutes 15 C Enable SMART Monitoring C Enable JBOD support Controller Primary Agent Information IP Address 206 235 238 198 206 235 238 198 58632 Socket Port 58632 uae Password Remove lt Verity password e Out t Band Agent preferred over In Band OK Cancel 120 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 8 For the program to recognize the out of band array and display an out of band HBA icon in the main window you need to send a Probe command to the server Choose View View Server and then click Probe View Server Sener 206 6 181 212 techtest Serer Information Status Good Operating System Suns 6 9 Agent Version 2 0 Release Build 0 IP Address 206 6 181 212 Socket Port 1270 Connection List Status Driver Good pci f 4000 ntraserver Ultra1 60 scsi Good
153. elete the logical drive and create a logical drive with the stripe size that you want Caution Only change the stripe size after you have tested the effects on your application Specify Default Write through or Write back as the Write Policy The write policy determines when cached data is written to the disk drives The ability to hold data in cache while it is being written to disk can increase storage device speed during sequential reads Write policy options include write through and write back Using write through cache the controller writes the data to the disk drive before signaling the host OS that the process is complete Write through cache has lower write operation and throughput performance than write back cache but it is the safer strategy with minimum risk of data loss on power failure Because a battery module is installed power is supplied to the data cached in memory and the data can be written to disk when power is restored Using write back cache the controller receives the data to write to disk stores it in the memory buffer and immediately sends the host OS a signal that the write operation is complete before the data is actually written to the disk drive Write back caching improves the performance of write operations and the throughput of the controller card Write back cache is enabled by default Note The setting you specify in the Write Back field on the Cache tab of the Change Controller Parameter
154. ely erased 37 Configuring Logical Drives and Logical Volumes The information contained in this section describes how to configure logical drives and logical volumes using Standard or Custom Configuration Logical Drives Depending on whether you want to use one or multiple RAID levels logical drives can be configured using Standard or Custom Configuration Logical Volumes Logical volumes are created using Custom Configuration only However while the ability to create and manage logical volumes remains a feature of Sun StorEdge Configuration Service the size and performance of physical and logical drives have made the use of logical volumes obsolete Logical volumes are unsuited to some modern configurations such as Sun Cluster environments and do not work in those configurations Avoid using them and use logical drives instead Maximum Number of Supported Logical Drives Logical Partitions and LUN Assignments The following table lists the maximum number of logical drives partitions per logical drive number of partitions per logical volume and maximum number of LUN assignments for the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and the Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array 38 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLE 4 1 Maximum Number of Supported Logical and Physical Drives Partitions and LUN Assignments Array Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI
155. em Administrator Manager sam to unmount the file system make sure it is closed before running the ioscan command 8 IBM AIX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to update the Object Data Manager ODM as explained in Updating the Object Data Manager on an IBM AIX Host on page 206 Media Scan A firmware menu option called Media Scan at Power Up specifies whether media scan runs automatically following a controller power cycle reset or after logical drive initialization This setting is disabled by default For more information refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide To determine whether or not media scan is running see the event log For more information on the event log window see Event Log Window on page 112 For more information about media scan see To Scan Physical Disks for Bad Blocks Media Scan on page 132 v To Clear a Configuration If at any time during the configuration process in the New Configuration window you are dissatisfied with the configuration you can clear it 1 Click Clear to remove all physical and logical drives from the display 2 Either click New LD to define a new logical drive or click Commit 3 When you click Commit a warning prompt is displayed click OK Sun StorEdge Configuration Service initializes the entire configuration on the selected array controller Chapter 4 Full
156. emaining logical drive size capacity moves to the last partition Remaining capacity can be used later by expanding the drive as explained in To Expand the Capacity of a Logical Drive or Logical Volume on page 164 The drive capacity is no longer editable after a partition is created Note If you want to create another logical drive on the same controller click New LD The logical drive you just defined is created and you are returned to the top of the window enabling you to create another logical drive For the maximum number of logical drives supported see TABLE 4 1 Solaris OS only If you want the new logical drive to be automatically labeled which enables the OS to use the drive click Write a new label to the new LD To use the logical drive immediately select On line Initialization Because logical drive initialization can take up to several hours you can choose to initialize a logical drive on line On line initialization enables you to begin configuring and using the logical drive before initialization is complete However because the controller is building the logical drive while performing I O operations initializing a logical drive on line requires more time than off line initialization If you do not select On line initialization you can configure and use the drive only after initialization is complete Because the controller is building the logical drive without having to also perform I O operations off
157. en stripes these blocks across several drives One drive is dedicated to parity In the event that a disk fails the original data can be reconstructed using the parity information and the information on the remaining disks In RAID 3 the total disk capacity is equivalent to the sum of the capacities of all drives in the combination excluding the parity drive Thus combining four 1 Gbyte drives for example creates a single logical drive with a total usable capacity of 3 Gbyte This combination appears to the system as a single logical drive RAID 3 provides increased data transfer rates when data is being read in small chunks or sequentially However in write operations that do not span every drive performance is reduced because the information stored in the parity drive needs to be recalculated and rewritten every time new data is written limiting simultaneous I O Logical drive Physical disks Dedicated parity FIGURE A 9 RAID 3 Configuration 218 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 RAID 5 RAID 5 implements multiple block striping with distributed parity This RAID level offers redundancy with the parity information distributed across all disks in the array Data and its parity are never stored on the same disk In the event that a disk fails original data can be reconstructed using the parity information and the information on the remaining disks Logical drive Physical disks
158. ent 0 Good 2000 Detaultivr 3 T Good 13989753 Detaultivr 3 Rebuild priority Low How often Starting Day Starting Time 3 One Time Hour Minute Dail AH Deny 02 30 w Weekly C PH Scheduleis Existing Schedule Mone Mext Parity Check 3 Make selections in the appropriate fields on this window m Listed Logical Drives A list of the available fault tolerant logical arrays Use the Shift key to select multiple drives Regenerate For RAID 3 and 5 configurations the parity checking procedure on a logical drive recalculates the parity of data stripes in each of the logical drive s RAID stripe sets and compares it with the stored parity For RAID 1 configurations if an inconsistency is encountered data is copied from the master disk to the slave disk If a bad block is encountered the data is copied from the other disk master or slave to the reporting disk drive reallocating the bad block Chapter 7 Maintaining the Array 131 regenerating might cause data loss Only select Regenerate after you have performed A Caution If an array s data parity is seriously damaged restoring data by any necessary data recovery based on the parity check errors Note If you select Regenerate make sure that Generate Error Event is also selected so that if inconsistent parity is encountered bad blocks are specified Generate Error Event default When a parity check is run and a discrepancy
159. ent Log an error code is an eight character code that consists of four fields of two characters each Some codes might be followed by a dash and another eight character code which is for internal use only The following tables describe the error codes used in each two character field The format of the four fields of two characters is d1d2d3d4 d5d6d7d8 where d1 the Severity Field d2 the Major Field d3 the Minor Field determines how d4 d5 d6 d7 and d8 are decoded TABLEG 1 Severity Field Severity Field Description 01 Critical 02 Warning 03 Informational TABLE G 2 Major Field Major Field Description 01 Unknown 05 06 Monitor daemon 08 Server daemon 09 JBOD Just a bunch of disks message 0A Communication 0B RAID Controller 268 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 The Minor field is defined in following table The definition of the Error Field is dependent upon the definition of the Minor Field in which case the appropriate Table is referenced TABLE G 3 Minor Field 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B OC OD OE 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1C 1D 1E Minor Field Description Unknown See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field Syste
160. environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to run the ioscan fnC disk command Note If you used System Administrator Manager sam to unmount the file system make sure it is closed before running the ioscan command 14 IBM AIX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to update the Object Data Manager ODM as explained in Updating the Object Data Manager on an IBM AIX Host on page 206 Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 163 v To Expand the Capacity of a Logical Drive or Logical Volume Use this option to expand the capacity of an existing logical drive or to expand the capacity of a logical volume For example you might originally have had a 72 Gbyte drive of which only 36 Gbyte was selected to build a logical drive To use the remaining 36 Gbyte you need to expand the logical drive RAID levels 0 1 3 and 5 support expansion Note To expand a logical volume you must first expand the logical drives that make up the logical volume 1 Select the array that you want to configure 2 Choose Configuration Custom Configure 3 Select Dynamically Grow and or Reconfigure LDs LVs from the Custom Configuration Options window 4 Select the logical drive or logical volume you want to expand 5 Select the Expand LD LV tab 6 Specify the capacity in Mbyte by which you want to expand the logical drive or logica
161. er Controller Primary Agent Information including the Password fields pertain to out of band management See In Band and Out of Band Storage Management on page 117 for information about configuring these parameters 9 If you have changed any of the previous options click OK to save your changes 10 Click Close to finish the procedure v To Enable JBOD Support Use Just a Bunch of Disks JBOD support only when you have a JBOD connected directly to the server This enables you to monitor the peripheral device condition and events If you have a JBOD connected to the RAID array the RAID controllers monitor the JBOD condition and events for you Note Enabling JBOD support could impact I O 1 From the main window choose View Agent Options Management The Agent Options Management window is displayed 26 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 2 Select Enable JBOD support For details on monitoring a JBOD see Monitoring JBODs on page 223 v To Verify Storage Configurations Once you have installed Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and have added all the servers for storage that you want managed you need to verify the storage configurations Note Most arrays are shipped preconfigured If you want to completely remove the existing configuration and start over see Full Configuration on page 37 If you want to change the current configuration or add to it se
162. erver window is displayed with Mailing Lists selected 4dd Server Server name Tech Properties Mailing Lists Grouping Mail Address Severity Mail Address test sun com Severity Critical Add to List Appendix E Email and SNMP 251 a For each user type an email address in the Mail Address field b In the Severity list box scroll through the list and select the desired one c Click Add to List To delete a user from the list select the mail address and click Delete from List d Indicate the mail server Click Setup Mail Server The Mail Server Setup window is displayed Mail Server Setup Gutgoing Mail SMTP Server I ox Hee Type the IP address or name of the Simple Mail Transport Protocol SMTP mail server that delivers the email messages to the destination addresses specified earlier e Click OK when you are satisfied with the information about the Mail Server window The Add Server or Edit Server window is displayed 5 Click OK when you are satisfied with the information about the Add Server or Edit Server window The Server Setup window is displayed 6 If you want to add additional servers repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each server 7 If necessary move the server or servers you want this console to control to the Managed Servers list If you are editing a server you must move it back to the Available Servers list 8 Click OK to r
163. ervers The predefined range is from 1 to 1024 I O operations per logical drive or you can choose the Auto Compute automatically configured setting The default value is 1024 I O operations per logical drive The appropriate setting depends on how many I O operations the attached servers and the controller itself are performing This can vary according to the amount of host memory present the number of drives and their size and buffer limitations If you increase the amount of host memory add more drives or replace drives with larger drives you might want to increase the maximum I O count But optimum performance usually results from using the Auto Compute or 256 settings FC and SATA only Select the type of Fibre Connection Sun StorEdge 3510 FC arrays and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA arrays support the following Fibre connection protocols m Point to Point Can be used only with a switched fabric network also called a Storage Attached Network SAN configuration Point to Point protocol supports full duplex communication but only allows one ID per channel m Loop FC AL Can be used with Direct Attached Storage DAS or SAN configurations FC AL supports only half duplex communication but allows up to eight Ds per channel Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for more information about point to point and loop protocols Set the LUNs Per Host This function is used to change
164. es and to return to the main menu Note In the event that an error message is displayed when mapping a host channel repeat Steps 1 through 5 Chapter 4 Full Configuration 61 v To Delete Unmap a Host LUN 1 With the Change Host LUN Assignments window displayed select the LUN to be deleted from the Host LUN Assignments field 2 Click Unmap Host LUN 3 When finished click OK to save your changes and to return to the main menu Configuration File Keep a backup copy of the current configuration on diskette or on an external device other than the array Even though configuration information is stored on array controllers and on the physical drives attached to them circumstances such as a fire or a flood can occur causing damage to both the controller and the drives A backup copy of the configuration enables you to restore the configuration to a new controller without having to completely reconfigure the storage array Always save the array controller configuration to a file whenever you m Install a new storage system enclosure or change the ID for the controller in an existing enclosure m Replace a controller m Reconfigure or add logical drives to a controller m Rebuild the data from a failed drive to a standby drive 62 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 v To Save a Configuration to a Backup File 1 Select the controller with the configuration you want to save 2 C
165. es show examples of in band and out of band storage management configurations Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 117 The console is communicating with the agent installed on server 1 1 1 1 through Ethernet The agent is Communicating with the array through a SCSI FC connection oO Agent 1 1 1 1 Array FIGURE 6 3 In Band Management For more information about configuring your array for out of band management see Email and SNMP on page 245 Console and agent The console is communicating with the agent installed on server 1 1 1 4 The agent is communicating directly with the array through Ethernet Array FIGURE 6 4 Out of Band Management 118 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 To Use Out of Band Management Note Controller SAF TE SES PLD and Drive firmware cannot be upgraded through out of band management Note If you assign an IP address to an array to manage it out of band for security reasons consider using an IP address on a private network rather than a publicly routable network Using the controller firmware to set a password for the controller limits unauthorized access to the array Changing the firmware s Network Protocol Support settings can provide further security by disabling the ability to remotely connect to the array using individual protocols such as HTTP HTTPS telnet FTP and SSH Refer to the Communication Parameters section of the
166. ess to the RAID array when the array is initialized or subsequently reset 2 If you have set up an array in an environment with a RARP server a Remove DHCP from the Selected box in the Dynamic IP Assignment Mechanism List b Add RARP to the Selected box in the Dynamic IP Assignment Mechanism List Note The firmware does not support multiple IP assignment mechanisms If a protocol is currently selected you must remove it before adding another protocol Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 199 3 If you prefer to have a static IP address a Deselect the Enable Dynamic IP Assignment check box b Type the static IP address the subnet mask and the gateway IP address into the appropriate boxes under Static IP Information 4 Click OK 5 When prompted to reset the controller click Yes Protocol Tab For security reasons you can enable only the network protocols you want to support which limits the ways in which security can be breached 1 From the Change Controller Parameters window select the Protocol tab Change Controller Parameters Serer 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8009328 Controller Information Firmware Version 411A Boot Record Version 1 31H Serial Number 8009328 CPU Type PPC750 Controller Name 15 Chars Max Cache Size 1024MB ECC SDRAM Controller Unique ID 003CE3 Append File ID 411401 3510 8410F Hex format O Not Defined PP _ Contro
167. estoring the array configuration backup file contents 142 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Controller Maintenance Options Controller maintenance options include shutting down the controller muting the controller beeper bringing a failed controller back online displaying performance statistics and determining controller boot time Downloading firmware options are also included in the Controller Maintenance Options window For information on downloading firmware see Updating the Configuration on page 149 To Reset the Controller Whenever you make changes to the controller parameters you are asked if you want to reset the controller so that the changes take effect If you are making multiple changes you might not want to stop and reset the controller after each change Use the Reset the Controller option to manually reset the controller after making multiple parameter changes Select any storage icon in the main window Choose Array Administration Controller Maintenance If you are not already logged in as ssconfig a password prompt is displayed type the ssconfig password The Controller Maintenance Options window is displayed Click Reset the Controller Note Resetting the controller on a Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array can result in host side error messages such as parity error and synchronous error messages No action is required and the condition correct
168. etailed information read about creating partitions and file systems in your Sun Solaris OS manual For the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array or the Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array only make sure the Solaris OS can recognize multiple logical unit numbers LUNs under the same ID You might need to modify kernel drv sd conf for additional LUN assignments For information on how to modify this file refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your atray Make sure the Solaris OS recognizes the new device and LUNs For detailed steps refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array Label a new device by typing mae The format command displays the system disk as well as other drives attached to the array Terminal window Edit Options Stopping Sun StorEdge Configuration Service daemons done sunblade sunbl ade sunblade sunbl ade sunblade devfsadm devlinks disks sunblade format Searching for disks done e1ltii4d0 configured with capacity of 1 9566 AVAILABLE DISK SELECTIONS 0 lt Ot0d0 873153204 cyl 29649 alt 2 hd 16 sec 63 gt fpci 1f 0 i de d dadeo o A new device must be labeled with the format command before it can be set up for use by the array When the format command is initiated the devices that are available for use are displayed Chapter 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 31
169. eturn to the main window 252 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 v Setting Up Servers to Send Traps If you have an enterprise management console on your network for example HP OpenView or IBM NetView you can configure servers to send traps about events to the console This section describes the configuration steps needed Note You need to follow the instructions in this section only if you want to send SNMP traps to other enterprise management consoles Caution If HP OpenView is installed on the same server that you are setting up to send traps to avoid initialization errors you need to reconfigure the system resources For instructions on reconfiguring system resources see the troubleshooting item Symptom HP OpenView won t install or the trap daemon won t start on page 262 Microsoft Windows Servers To configure a Microsoft Windows server to send SNMP traps to one or more enterprise management consoles you need to configure each SNMP service on the server to make sure that m The server lists the community string or community name of the enterprise management console m The server lists the enterprise management console as the recipient of traps from the Microsoft Windows agent software v To Check the Community String for a Microsoft Windows Host You can use the default community name or community string of public However choosing a community name other than p
170. example the new logical drive is composed of three physical disks totaling 103428 Mbyte as indicated in the Available Size MB field The maximum number of disks per logical drive for each RAID level for a 2U array is RAID 0 36 RAID 1 2 RAID 1 0 36 RAID 3 or 5 31 For RAID 1 note that if you select four or more drives a logical drive with a RAID 1 0 is created 10 Set the Max Drive Size The Max Drive Size displays the total capacity of each disk A smaller logical drive can be created by decreasing this value Chapter 4 Full Configuration 51 Note If you do not change the Max Drive Size but you change the Partition Size a new partition is created at the specified partition size The remaining logical drive size capacity moves to the last partition If you do change the Max Drive Size the remaining capacity can be used later by expanding the drive as explained in To Expand the Capacity of a Logical Drive or Logical Volume on page 164 11 From the Channel and ID list boxes select the host channel and ID to which you want the new logical drive mapped Host channels connect to host computers either directly or indirectly through switches or other devices Select the appropriate host channel based on the physical connection from the server to the array The ID is a unique address that identifies the logical drive to the host Note If you do not want to map the logical drive at this time select Do No
171. f a server is a member of a group and a user deletes that group from the group list box servers are reassigned in that group to the no group category The tree is remapped in the main window The Monitoring Process The console monitors storage devices on a network by communicating with an agent on the servers When the program is started the console software begins by establishing contact with the agent on each managed server if Auto Discovery was specified when the server was configured If Auto Discovery was not specified you have to double click each server and provide a password to start the discovery process for that server Establishing a TCP IP connection between the console and the agent on each server and receiving back inventory information can take several minutes depending on the complexity of the network When this is occurring the server icon in the main window displays a satellite dish icon on its right side Once the inventory is refreshed the satellite dish symbol is replaced by an active server symbol Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 81 82 The agent on each server does a periodic scan of its inventory to check for changes If there is a change the agent sends an event to the console Depending on the event the console might request the inventory from that server s last scan to use for updating the representation of the server as displayed on the main window During this process the satellite dish icon is attached
172. fc 2 Type the following command lscfg vl device name The output displayed includes the network address which is the HBA WWN lscfg ou_txt Notepad _ OF x File Edit Search Help LOCATION DESCRIPTION Fest FC Adapter EC Level Serial ROS Level Device Specific 26 20026660 Device Device Specific 22 b68066068 Device 02 866969 Device Specific z4 FF401050 Device 02C 83891 Device Specific 26 86433891 Device 07433891 Device Specific 28 HHBBBBRCIS2AAFS2 Device Device Specific 2A C1D3 82A1 Device C203 82A1 Device Specific YL P1 11 91 242 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 v To Determine the FC Array WWNN 1 Double click the array icon f in the main Configuration Service window or select it and choose View View Controller The Node name is displayed in the Node name field in the View Controller Configuration window peal View Controller Configuration Po Serer 206 6 181 212 techtest Node name 206000COFFOO3CE3 Controller Ch O Id 40 SUN StorEdge 3510 A A SN 8009328 Status Good A A State Details Active A A State Active Total Physical Drives T Global Write Policy Write back View Controller Params Controllers Physical Drives Enclosure Info Cotl Status Manufacturer Driver Fiy Revy Total Fats Cache Size D Good SUN StorEdge 3510 4 136 1 1024 Good SUM StorEdge 3510 4 136 0 1024 Note The WWNN information
173. fied logical drive When a member drive of this specified logical drive fails the local spare drive becomes a member drive and automatically starts to rebuild Global Spare Drive A global spare drive does not only serve one specified logical drive When a member drive from any of the logical drives fails the global spare drive joins that logical drive and automatically starts to rebuild 210 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 Channels You can connect up to 15 devices excluding the controller itself to a SCSI channel when the Wide function is enabled 16 bit SCSI You can connect up to 125 devices to an FC channel in loop mode Each device has a unique ID that identifies the device on the SCSI bus or FC loop A logical drive consists of a group of SCSI drives Fibre Channel drives or SATA drives Physical drives in one logical drive do not have to come from the same SCSI channel Also each logical drive can be configured for a different RAID level A drive can be assigned as the local spare drive to one specified logical drive or as a global spare drive A spare is not available for logical drives that have no data redundancy RAID 0 Drive channel 0 Drive channel 1 Global spare Local spare for LD1 RAID 5 RAID 3 146 GB 146 GB Logical drive O Logical drive 1 FIGURE A 2 Allocation of Drives in Logical Drive Configurations Appendix A RAID Basics 211 You can divide
174. for information about setting the controller date and time Controller Boot Time Boot Time June 15 2004 10 30 26 AM POT Current Time June 15 2004 10 37 52 AM POT Time one GMT 08 00 es To Convert a Dual Controller Array to a Single Controller Array If one controller fails in a dual array controller configuration you might want to run a single controller for an extended period of time so that the array does not display as degraded in the console Make sure you know the serial number of the controller being removed You can check the event log for the failed controller s serial number or check the console and make a note of the primary controller s serial number Change the remaining controller s redundancy setting to disabled You must use the firmware application to disable redundancy on the controller Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for your array for information about accessing the firmware application and then from the Main Menu choose view and edit Peripheral devices Set Peripheral Device Entry gt Redundant Controller Primary Disable redundant controller Stop the agent For information about how to stop the agent see the chapter for your OS in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Installation Guide Change to var opt SUNWsscs ssagent and edit the file sscontlr txt The very last line in the file contains the serial numbers of both controllers
175. ge 3320 SCSI array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array in the output Unless specifically noted that a function and therefore its example screen is for a specific array only all arrays apply Superuser Privileges You must be superuser administrator to run the Sun StorEdge Configuration Service console Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI Array The only Sun StorEdge Configuration Service array functions supported for the Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array are viewing component and alarm characteristics and determining drive failure See Monitoring JBODs on page 223 for procedures related to the Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array Sun StorEdge 3000 Family JBODs The only Sun StorEdge Configuration Service array functions supported for Sun StorEdge 3000 family JBODs are viewing component and alarm characteristics and determining drive failure See Monitoring JBODs on page 223 for procedures related to Sun StorEdge 3000 family JBODs Note JBOD Just a Bunch of Disks is an array connected directly to a server with no controllers 4 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 CHAPTER 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service This chapter explains how to start Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and provides an overview of the main window which displays attached storage devices It also describes procedures you need to follow before you can configure and m
176. ge 3320 SN OO0002 Standard Configuration creates a basic defaut RAID set including diwe size quantity and diwe assignments The options that you select replace the existing configuration Check your Operating System device capacity limitations before using this option Total Available Drives 36 3 RADO Striping with HO fault tolerance Ci RADI Mirrored or Duplexed drives Striping with taut tolerance provided RAID 3 O by a dedicated panty diwe Stnping with faut tolerance prowided RAIDS a i by distributing panty data _ Use a standby drive Write a new label to the new LD Pal On line Initialization Stripe Size 128 KE Detault hall White Policy Detauk inte back 4 hal or Cancel Help The options on the window might be disabled depending on the number of drives available and whether you have the Solaris OS or a Windows OS on the server Note In FC and SATA configurations with large device capacities the size of the logical drive might exceed the device capacity limitation of your OS Be sure to check the device capacity limitation of your OS before using Standard Configuration The cluster configuration option creates a quorum RAID 5 logical drive 100 Mbyte and then allocates the remaining capacity over two large RAID 5 logical drives For this option three or more physical drives are required Verify the server and the controller IDs displayed at the top of the window are c
177. ge 78 for further details Red One or more components of this group or server are not a working which has placed the device in a critical state See Critical State on page 78 for further details Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 77 Degraded State Reasons for which a device might be placed in a degraded state include but are not limited to the following m Depending on the size of the logical drive and the number of physical drives it contains a logical drive that has one or more failed physical drives can be operating in a degraded state See View Logical Drive on page 93 to determine the status of the logical drive and the status of the physical drives that make up the logical drive m If one or more of the environmental components including the power supplies fans and temperature is not working but the array is still functional the enclosure array and server icons indicate a degraded state See View Enclosure on page 95 for more information m If the controller shuts down because the option to shut down the controller if the temperature exceeds the threshold limits has been enabled the controller is operating in a degraded state See Peripheral Tab on page 195 for more information m For the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array a degraded state might indicate that the battery is going to expire in 21 days or that the in service date has not been set for a replacement battery Se
178. ged Error and Status Messages Most error and status messages are self explanatory TABLE G 32 clarifies terms which are used in messages TABLE G 33 lists the Error Status messages TABLE G 32 Substituted Values Value Channel Fan Enclosure LogicalArray LogicalDrive Lun Name Power Slot State Target Temperature Description Card channel number indicating a SCSI channel A value of 1 indicates the first channel Fan number Enclosure number Logical array number Logical Drive number LUN number A text name Power supply number Slot number State of a logical array or a device or an enclosure in text The values are Critical Online Offline Critical Rebuild Non Existent Low Battery Normal A target or SCSI ID number The temperature in centigrade 286 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 TABLE G 33 Error Status Messages Error and Status Messages A SCSI Drive Failed Ch d Id d Replace the defective drive A tape has been left in the autoloader by a previous hardware fault Insert an empty magazine to clear the fault If the fault does not clear turn the autoloader off and then on again If the problem persists call the tape drive supplier helpline A user named ssconfig must be created for configuring SUNWsscs Diag Reporter Abort Clone SCSI Drive Abort Initialization Abort Parity Check Abort Rebuild Access denied for one or
179. gical Drive Bad Block Table 1B Logical Drive Bad Block 1C Logical Drive Media Scan Bad Block Recovery 1D Logical Drive Media Scan bad Block Recovered 1E Logical Drive Parity Event Error Field Generalized Target Event TABLE G 30 Generalized Target Event Errors Error Field Description 01 General Power Supply Failure Detected 02 DC Failure Detected 03 AC Failure Detected 04 DC Over Voltage Warning 05 DC Under Voltage Warning 06 DC Over Voltage Critical 07 DC Under Voltage Critical 08 General Power Supply State Change Critical 09 General Power Supply Failure Condition ended Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 283 TABLE G 30 Generalized Target Event Errors Continued Error Field OA OB OC OD OE OF 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Description DC Failure Condition ended AC Failure Condition ended DC Under Voltage Condition ended DC Over Voltage Condition ended Temperature General State Change General Temperature Alert High Temperature Warning Low Temperature Warning High Temperature Critical Low Temperature Critical General Temperature State Change Critical General Temperature Alert ended High Temperature Condition ended Low Temperature Condition ended Temperature General State Change Fan General Failure Detected Low RPM Warning High RPM Warning Low RPM Critical High RPM Critical General Fan State Change Critical General Fan Failure Co
180. gnment Status Size Stripe Size LOO 3 1 5 Primary Good 68952 WE 128 KB LD 1 aji 5 Primary Good Bogo2 ME 125 KB LD 2 2 1 0 Frimar Good 60953 ME 128 KB 12 Click OK in the Confirm Configuration Operation window to complete the operation and click Close The console refreshes and the array is redisplayed no longer showing the logical drive 13 HP UX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to run the ioscan fnC disk command Note If you used System Administrator Manager sam to unmount the file system make sure it is closed before running the ioscan command 14 IBM AIX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to update the Object Data Manager ODM as explained in Updating the Object Data Manager on an IBM AIX Host on page 206 The Logical Drive Logical Volume Number The logical drive logical volume number referenced with each logical drive is dynamic it changes when logical drives are created deleted This number is displayed in the logical drive LDs LVs field of several windows including Dynamically Grow and or Reconfigure LDs LVs Change Host LUN Assignments Manage Existing LDs LVs and Partitions and the main window 158 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Used strictly as a placeholder that enables you to visually keep track of logi
181. hat was established earlier c Click OK Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 6 Optional Set email addresses a If you want Sun StorEdge Configuration Service to send event messages using email select the Mailing Lists tab and continue with the following directions You might want to type your own email address and the addresses of selected users for the purpose of receiving information about events on the server Note Instead of keeping the console running in the foreground you can use Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter a companion utility of Sun StorEdge Configuration Service that runs as a background service that sends messages from the hosts and array to specified email addresses For details refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Diagnostic Reporter User s Guide To ensure that Sun StorEdge Configuration Service receives email see Email and SNMP on page 245 for information on setting traps For another method of receiving event alerts see Sending SNMP Traps Without Using Sun StorEdge Configuration Service on page 258 You can also use the Sun StorEdge Automated Diagnostic Environment StorADE application to monitor the status of your array Add Server Sever name Techi Properties Mailing Lists Grouping Mail Address Severity Mail Address test suncom o Severity Creal Ka e a b For each user type an email address in the Mail Address field
182. he Fibre Connection protocol for changes to take effect reset the controller Redundancy Tab 1 From the Change Controller Parameters window select the Redundancy tab Change Controller Parameters Serer 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8009328 Controller Information Firmware Yersion 3 31D Boot Record Version 1 31H Serial Number 8009328 CPU Type PPC 50 Controller Name Cache Si 1024MB ECC SDRAM 16 Chars Max ache Size Controller Unique ID A File 1 10 S406F Hex formatO Not Defined 003CE3 ppend File ID 331D3 3510 S406 _ Controller Reset _ Mute Beeper CEE Ee AE Reece A E Controller Configuration Redundant Primary Controller Status Redundant Enabled Secondary Serial No 8009200 Set Controller Config No Change v Write Through Cache Synchronization Synchronization w Primary Controller Position Lower Synchronization Not Synchronized 194 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 2 Select an option from the Set Controller Config field m Redundant Deassert Reset If you have failed a controller and want to bring it back online m Redundant Force Sec Fail If you want to force the secondary controller to fail m Redundant Force Pri Fail If you want to force the primary controller to fail Note Set both controllers in the Redundant Primary configuration The controllers then determine which one is prima
183. he Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Installation Guide For information about using Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Diagnostic Reporter User s Guide Unless otherwise specified the Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array are referred to as the array or arrays This guide is written for experienced system administrators who are familiar with Sun hardware and software products xix How This Book Is Organized This book covers the following topics Chapter 1 introduces Sun StorEdge Configuration Service features Chapter 2 lists steps to follow to ensure that the array has been configured properly before you install and use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Chapter 3 contains procedures for setting up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Chapter 4 provides instructions for configuring the array Chapter 5 explains how to create a LUN filter to maintain large Fibre Channel networks that share common storage FC and SATA Only Chapter 6 explains how to monitor the array Chapter 7 explains how to maintain the integrity of the array Chapter 8 explains how to change or add to the current array configuration Appendix A provides basic redundant array of independent disks RAID information Appendix B explains how to monitor a standalone JBOD Appendix C provides information abou
184. he beeper has no effect on failed component alarms Symptom The console appears to run slowly Sun StorEdge Configuration Service can monitor and manage up to 32 arrays at one time However console response time can decrease as the number of arrays being managed increases When the amount of memory used approaches the total available virtual memory physical memory plus the page file size the excessive paging likely causes problems resulting in poor performance of all applications on that workstation Increase the physical memory and page file size to increase the overall virtual memory To change the page file size select Control Panel System and then choose the Performance tab in the System Properties window that is displayed Symptom Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter stops working UNIX OS There are three conditions under which Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter stops working and does not report its condition The workaround is to stop and restart it m If the agent fails or is stopped and restarted Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter stops working m If the Config Tool is running and the daemon is stopped and restarted a condition might occur whereby the Config Tool can no longer communicate with the daemon 264 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 m If the agent fails or is stopped the daemon does not detect it stops sending email messages and continues to show that Sun StorEdge
185. hed in memory and the data can be written to disk when power is restored Using write back cache the controller receives the data to write to disk stores it in the memory buffer and immediately sends the host OS a signal that the write operation is complete before the data is actually written to the disk drive Write back caching improves the performance of write operations and the throughput of the controller card Write back cache is enabled by default Note The setting you specify in the Write Back field on the Cache tab of the Change Controller Parameters window is the default global cache setting for all logical drives See Cache Tab on page 185 13 Click OK 14 To add this logical drive to a logical volume click New LD and see To Add a Logical Drive to a Logical Volume on page 153 152 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 15 16 17 18 When you are satisfied with the selections on this window and do not want to define another logical drive click Commit A confirmation window is displayed showing the new configuration Click OK to accept the configuration or Cancel to return to the console Note You cannot change a logical drive configuration after you click OK Note During initialization LD LV size is displayed as 0 Mbyte HP UX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to
186. her double click the enclosure icon g of the array you want to view or select the enclosure icon and choose View View Enclosure The upper two sections of the window identify the enclosure and provide related information Note that when there are multiple enclosures you can use the Enclosure Number list box to reflect another enclosure attached to the same controller sss View Enclosure Serer 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Ch 0 ld 40 SUM StorEdge 3510 A A SM 0009328 Manufacturer SIN Firmware Rev 1046 1046 Model StorEdge 3510F A Fackage PLO Rey 1000 1000 Power n Time BIA Enclosure Number Fower on Cycles MIA Alarm State Mo Alarm Environmental State Summary Component Status Power Supply 0 Power Good Power Supply 1 Fans Good Battery and voltage status GB Fan 0 are not displayed for the SE Fan 1 Ea A 2 Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array SB Fan 2 car p Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array GB Fan 2 or the Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI H Temperature 0 voltage Good 2 array Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 95 96 Alarm State applies only if you have an array with a SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosure SAF TE SCSI or SCSI Enclosure Services SES Fibre Channel or SATA card m If the Alarm State field displays Alarm it means that there is an alarm caused by a failure of a drive fan power supply or battery or by an abnormal temperature in the enclosure The audible alarm on the box sounds m Fo
187. his option to delete one or more logical drives or to delete logical volumes from an existing configuration of RAID sets Note Before you can delete a logical drive or logical volume you need to unmap all assigned LUNs Select the array that contains the logical drives or logical volumes you want to delete To view the existing logical drives or logical volumes select View Logical Drive If any of the logical drives or logical volumes have host LUN assignments proceed to Step 4 to delete them if they do not proceed to Step 8 Choose Configuration Custom Configure Select Change Host LUN Assignments Select the host LUNs attached to the logical drive or logical volume you want to unmap and click Unmap Host LUN Click Close The console refreshes and the logical drive is displayed as UNMAPPED Choose Configuration Custom Configure Select Manage Existing LDs LVs and Partitions Select the LDs LVs tab Select the logical drive or logical volume you want to delete click Delete and click OK Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 157 When deleting a logical volume after you click Delete the logical volume is deleted but the logical drives that make up the logical drive are displayed l Manage Existing LOs L Vs and Partitions Sewer 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Primary SUM StorEdge 3310 SN O007 725 LOsiL s Partitions LOWLY 0ws Parts RAID Assi
188. his selection is inactive unless you have selected an array with available physical drives Select Add LDs LVs to the Current Configuration from the Custom Configuration Options window Verify that the server and controller displayed at the top of the window are correct Select Use existing LDs to create LVs If you do not see any logical drives listed under Select disks for logical drive the logical drives have not been unmapped and therefore are unavailable to select You must unmap the logical drives first Select a logical drive and click Add to LV Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 155 7 When you have finished adding logical drives to the logical volume to create another logical volume or an individual logical drive click Commit LV When you have finished creating logical volumes and do not want to create an individual logical drive click Commit Note When you are finished creating logical volumes and want to exit the New Configuration window if you accidentally click Commit LV instead of Commit you will have to create another logical drive otherwise you have to click Cancel and configure the logical volume again HP UX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to run the ioscan fnC disk command Note If you used System Administrator Manager sam to unmount the file system make sure it is closed before running the ioscan co
189. hoose Configuration Save Configuration The Save Configuration window is displayed Save Configuration Look in CA cfgsavset x rs ft oo ie a ESTER EER Filename _ storedge cfg Save Files of type configuration file cfg v Cancel 3 If necessary navigate to the drive and folder where you want the configuration file to be saved Save the file to a diskette or a drive external to the array 4 Specify the configuration file name and click Save The Save Configuration window is displayed Save Configuration Server 206 235 238 65 SUNblade Card Primary SUN StorEdge 3310 A A Array SN 000032 Directory JopvSUNWsscsissesconsole cfgsayset File storedge cfg Enter Description for the Sayeset here ok Cancel Help 5 Type a description of the configuration you are saving 6 Click OK The controller configuration information is saved to a cfg file Chapter 4 Full Configuration 63 Loading the Configuration If a drive or controller is damaged and needs to be replaced see To Restore a Logical Drive Configuration on page 140 which describes how to load a configuration file and restore a logical drive configuration 64 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 CHAPTER 5 LUN Filtering FC and SATA Only This chapter explains how to create a LUN filter for the Sun StorEdge 3510 Fibre Channel array
190. hree Write Verify list boxes Normally errors might occur when a hard drive writes data To avoid the write error the controller can force the hard drives to verify the written data a Write Verify on Initialization Performs verify after write while initializing the logical drive m Write Verify on Rebuild Performs verify after write during the rebuilding process m Write Verify on Normal Performs verify after write during normal I O requests Normal Improved or High Select from the four options available in the Rebuild Priority list box Low The RAID controller provides a background rebuilding ability This means the controller is able to serve other I O requests while rebuilding the logical drives The time required to rebuild a drive set largely depends on the total capacity of the logical drive being rebuilt Additionally the rebuilding process is totally transparent to the host computer or the OS Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 189 m Low The default that uses the controller s minimum resources to rebuild Normal To speed up the rebuilding process m Improved To allocate more resources to the rebuilding process m High to use the controller s maximum resources to complete the rebuilding process in the shortest time possible Drive I F Tab 1 From the Change Controller Parameters window select the Drive I F tab Change Controller Parameters Sewer 206 6 181 212 techte
191. ical volume is displayed in the Available Size MB field Note Because the logical volume has not been partitioned yet the Part Size MB and the Available Size MB are equal A single logical volume is considered to be a single partition Note Mixing SATA and FC logical drives to create a logical volume is not supported 3 To create another logical drive to add to the logical volume click New LD 4 Create the logical drive and add it to the logical volume by clicking Add to LV Repeat this step for every logical drive you want to add to the logical volume 5 To create a partition see To Create a Partition on page 160 6 When you have finished adding logical drives to the logical volume to create another logical volume or an individual logical drive click Commit LV When you are finished creating logical volumes and do not want to create an individual logical drive click Commit Note When you are finished creating logical volumes and want to exit the New Configuration window if you accidentally click Commit LV instead of Commit you will have to create another logical drive otherwise you have to click Cancel and configure the logical volume again 7 HP UX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to run the ioscan fnC disk command Note If you used System Administrator Manager sam to unmount the file system make sure it is clo
192. ical drive is twenty 36 Mbyte drives and the total number of logical drives is 2 the disk space available for storage is equal to 18 disk drives 18 x 36 Mbyte 648 Mbyte RAID 0 RAID 0 implements block striping where data is broken into logical blocks and is striped across several drives Unlike other RAID levels there is no facility for redundancy In the event of a disk failure data is lost In block striping the total disk capacity is equivalent to the sum of the capacities of all drives in the array This combination of drives appears to the system as a single logical drive RAID 0 provides the highest performance It is fast because data can be simultaneously transferred to or from every disk in the array Furthermore read writes to separate drives can be processed concurrently Logical drive z O DRR Physical disks T FIGURE A 6 RAID 0 Configuration Appendix A RAID Basics 215 RAID 1 RAID 1 implements disk mirroring where a copy of the same data is recorded onto two drives By keeping two copies of data on separate disks data is protected against a disk failure If at any time a disk in the RAID 1 array fails the remaining good disk copy can provide all of the data needed thus preventing downtime In disk mirroring the total usable capacity is equivalent to the capacity of one drive in the RAID 1 array Thus combining two 1 Gbyte drives for example creates a single logical drive with a total usabl
193. idered a failed drive The default setting for SCSI I O Timeout is 30 seconds Caution Do not change this setting Setting the timeout to a lower value causes the controller to judge a drive as failed while a drive is still retrying or while a drive is unable to arbitrate the SCSI bus Setting the timeout to a greater value causes the controller to keep waiting for a drive and it might sometimes cause a host timeout Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 191 When the drive detects a media error while reading from the drive platter it retries the previous reading or recalibrates the head When the drive encounters a bad block on the media it reassigns the bad block to another spare block on the same disk drive However all of this takes time The time to perform these operations can vary between different brands and models of drives During SCSI bus arbitration a device with higher priority can use the bus first A device with lower priority sometimes receives a SCSI I O Timeout when devices of higher priority keep using the bus 7 From the Drive Check Period s field select from 0 5 through 30 seconds The Periodic Drive Check Time is an interval for the controller to check the drives on the SCSI bus The default value is Disabled which means if there is no activity on the bus the controller does not know if a drive has failed or has been removed Setting an interval enables the program to detect a drive failure when there is no ar
194. ile Look in Cletswst cal ft El Oo oo File name test _rk ctg Open Files of type StorEdgeconfiguration fl cfg Cancel 3 Specify the name and location of the backup configuration file and click Open 140 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 The Load Configuration window is displayed To see a tree view representation of the configuration click the Configuration View tab Load Configuration Server 206 235 238 63 E3000 Card Primary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 3150320 Current Directory foptSUNvsscs ssesconsole cfgsayset Selected File test1 _rfk cfg Brows Configuration View Saveset Description Logical Drive 0 Partition 0 LUN 0 RAID 5 3000 MB Logical Drive 0 Partition 1 LUN 1 RAID 5 3000 MB Logical Drive 0 Partition 2 LUN 1 RAID 5 4000 MB Logical Drive 1 Partition 0 LUN 0 RAID 1 2000 MB Logical Drive 1 Partition 1 LUN 1 RAID 1 1000 MB Logical Drive 1 Partition 2 LUN 1 RAID 1 1000 MB _ Show other savesets in the current directory This Server Only _ Write a new label to the new LD All Servers File Name Server Card Identifier Save Date test1_rtk cfg 206 235 238 632 Primary Sun Tue May OF 13 48 30 PD OK Cancel Help The Saveset Description tab displays the description of the file that was specified when the configuration file was created Load Configuration
195. imary controller characteristics select the primary controller from the main window and choose View View Controller or double click the primary controller 90 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 The following two examples show the primary controller Sun StorEdge TM Configuration Service File View Configuration Array Administration Help Main View f 206 235 238 70 Me262 Eh 206 235 238 65 S unblade FEEE ch 0 Id 0 SUN StorEdge 3310 A A Array SN 123456 o ule Secondary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 6666GG W Array Ch 0 Id 14 SUN StorEdge 3310 A meh Primary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 555555 206 235 238 52 B52 View Primary Controller Configuration Server 206 235 238 65 Sunblade Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 555555 Binding rctr2000 Status Degraded Total Logical Drives 2 Vendor SUN Total Physical Drives 24 Driver StorEdge 3310 Cache Size 512 MB Firmware Rey 3 250 Rebuild Rate Lowy A4 A Controller State Active A A Controller 0 A State Details Active View FRU View Controller Params Partitions Normal Map Filter Map 2600 MB View FRU is not displayed for the Sun StorEdge 3510 Fibre Channel array Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 91 92 The following two examples show the secondary controller Sun StorEdgelTM Configuration Service File View Configuration Array Administration Help Ef 206
196. ime or a greater size is needed to replace the failed drive the local spare is used If there is a failed drive in the RAID 5 logical drive replace the failed drive with a new drive to keep the logical drive working To identify a failed drive refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for your array Caution If when trying to remove a failed drive you mistakenly remove the wrong drive you can no longer access the logical drive because you have incorrectly failed another drive A local spare drive is a standby drive assigned to serve one specified logical drive When a member drive of this specified logical drive fails the local spare drive becomes a member drive and automatically starts to rebuild 220 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 A local spare drive always has higher priority than a global spare drive that is if a drive fails and there is a local spare and a global spare drive available the local spare drive is used Local spare drive FIGURE A 11 Local Dedicated Spare A global spare drive is available for all logical drives rather than serving only one logical drive see FIGURE A 12 When a member drive from any of the logical drives fails the global spare drive joins that logical drive and automatically starts to rebuild A local spare drive always has higher priority than a global spare drive that is if a drive fails and there is a local
197. in service date has not been set for a battery FRU A critical red status is displayed when a battery has expired See Device Status on page 77 for a description of device status symbols To view the battery status choose View View Enclosure or double click the enclosure The View Enclosure window is displayed showing the battery status in the Summary box sss ee View Enclosure Sener 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Ch 0 Id 40 SUM StorEdge 3510 A A SM 0009328 Manufacturer SUN Firmware Rev 1046 1046 Model StorEdge 3510F A Fackage PLO Rey 1000 1000 Power un Time BIA Enclosure Number Fower on Cycles MIA Alarm State Mo Alarm Environmental State Component Status oneal Power Supply 0 Power Good Power Supply 1 A Fan 0 amp Fan 1 Thermal Good A Fan 3 H Temperature 0 Voltage Good G Fans Good ob H To view battery information including type status manufacture date in service date and expiration date click Battery The Battery Information window is displayed 104 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Note If the battery type is an early board module FRU ID 370 5545 REVB then battery expiration monitoring is not supported Battery Information Server 206 255 256 60 nighthawk SES Array Ch 2 Id 12 SUN StorEdge 3510F A Status Manufacture Date In Service Date Expiration Date Jan 4 2003 Jan 2 2004 Jan 4 2006
198. indow the partitions are displayed i Q 206 255 238 52 B52 EEE ch 0 1d 0 SUN StorEdge 3310 A A Array SN 123456 E Secondary SUH StorEdge 3310 SN 555555 S Logical Drive 1 736122C 1 RAID 5 6666 MB i a oho J Logical Drive 1 Partition 0 2222 MB Map 1 1 0 i A ia J Logical Drive 1 Partition 1 2222 MB Map 1 1 1 Logical Drive 1 Partition 2 2222 MB Map 1 1 2 16 HP UX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to run the ioscan fnC disk command Note If you used System Administrator Manager sam to unmount the file system make sure it is closed before running the ioscan command Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 161 17 IBM AIX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to update the Object Data Manager ODM as explained in Updating the Object Data Manager on an IBM AIX Host on page 206 The Logical Drive Logical Volume Number For important information regarding the logical drive logical volume number displayed in the LDs LVs field in the Manage Existing LDs LVs and Partitions window see The Logical Drive Logical Volume Number on page 158 v To Delete a Partition Note To delete a partition on a logical drive or logical volume you need to unmap all assigned LUNs 1 Select the array that contains the logical drives or logical
199. ing 020b60206 00000500 Event Message Logical Drive 1 Rebuild Completed The consoles begin to receive events when they are running regardless of whether the Event Log window is open 1 To delete the event log file click Delete Logfile The Confirmation window is displayed prompting you to save the log file Note To delete the event log file a server must be online 2 Select one of the following options m Select yes at the prompt select a folder and a file name and save the log file m Select no at the prompt The contents of the log file is deleted Note You can also save and delete the contents of the eventlog txt file using the Save Event Log and Delete Event Log icons on the toolbar Each event record contains the fields shown in the following table 112 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLE 6 6 Event Record Fields Date The date on the server when the event occurred Time The time on the server when the event occurred Server The IP address of the server and the server name Card The card name if applicable for the event One of three severity levels Critical Warning or Informational Severity These states are described in the following subsection The basic error code and the extended error code separated by a Error Code dash Text Message A text message describing the event Severity Levels m Critical A message that does requir
200. ing example Sun StorEdgel TM Configuration Service File View Configuration Array Administration Help Managing server Main view Filter view 206 235 238 52 B52 FEEEW Ch 0 Id 0 SUN StorEdge 3310 A A Array SN 123456 5 a Secondary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 555555 Array H Logical Drive 1 736122C1 RAID 5 6666 MB im Secon dary con troller 7 Logical Drive 1 Partition 0 2222 MB Map 1 1 0 i Ti am Logical Drive 1 Partition 1 2222 MB Map 1 1 1 Partitioned logical drive lz Logical Drive 1 Partition 2 2222 MB Map 1 1 2 Logical Drive 3 RAID 0 6000 MB Logical Drive 5 RAID 3 8000 MB Logical drive Array Ch 0 Id 14 SUN StorEdge 3310 A Array Ch 2 Id 11 SEAGATE ST336605L5UH36G 34732 MB Enclosure Array Ch 2 Id 12 SEAGATE ST336605LSUN36G 34732 MB Available physical Ze Array Ch 2 Id 13 SEAGATE S1336605LSUN36G 34732 MB drives Primary controller Selecting the container symbol to the left of any logical drive displays its assigned physical drives Note You can choose to view the physical hard drives that make up the logical drives by selecting or deselecting View Display HDD under LD Your configuration might differ dramatically from that shown in the previous figure depending on the products you have installed If the array is not configured see Full Configuration on page 37 for instructions on configuring it 6 Check the RAID level and logical drive struc
201. inished adding logical volumes click OK 8 In the Create New Volume Group window click OK 9 When you have finished creating logical volumes close the Disk and File System window and close sam 34 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 What to Do Next Sun StorEdge Configuration Service is now installed set up and ready to use See the following chapters for additional tasks m Monitoring the Array on page 75 for information about how to use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service to monitor storage devices a Maintaining the Array on page 127 for information about maintaining the array It includes detailed information about parity checking scheduling parity checks rebuilding failed drives and restoring a configuration from a backup file a Updating the Configuration on page 149 when you want to update the configuration of the storage array It also covers changing controller features making or changing a standby drive and editing the information for available servers Chapter 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 35 36 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 CHAPTER 4 Full Configuration Sun preconfigures logical drives on the array before shipment Read this chapter only if the array is not already configured or if you want to completely remove the existing configuration and start again If you want to
202. inventory 178 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 v To Change Controller Parameters 1 Select the array 2 Choose Configuration Custom Configure If necessary log in to the configuration level of the program with the ssconfig password The Custom Configuration Options window is displayed 3 From the Custom Configuration Options window select Change Controller Parameters The Change Controller Parameters window with the Channel tab selected is displayed Sener 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Information Firmware version Serial Number Controller Mame 15 Chars Max Controller Unique ID Hex format O Mot Defined _ Controller Reset Channel RS 232 Chl LogChl Mode 0 Host Host Drive Drive Host Host Note For the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and the Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array the CurClk is 2 0 4 11E eO09s26 Controller CPL Type TECH Fc Cache Size Cache Type FIBRE FIBRE FIBRE FIBRE FIBRE FIBRE GHz Disk Array PID 40 BIA 14 14 44 Drive IF SID BIA 42 15 15 46 Host IF Det lk Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto OO40E2 Append File ID _ Mute Beeper Detyvid Serial Serial Serial Serial Serial Serial Boot Record Version Redundancy Change Controller Parameters Primar SUM StorEdge 3510 SM eo0g9326 1 31H FPPFEr50 1024M B ECC SDRAM 411E 3510 5421F
203. ion a Disk 2 Unknown Right click on the drive for which 54 MB g4 ME you want to create a partition Online Unallocated Respond appropriately to the partition wizard prompts To Create IBM AIX Host Logical Volumes When you are satisfied with your storage configuration you need to create at least one logical volume on the server The following steps are general guidelines For detailed information read about creating logical volumes in your AIX OS manual Determine that the drives are being recognized by the host by typing Ensure that the disks have been assigned a PVID physical volume identifier This information displays in the second column If no PVID is assigned the column displays None If no PVID is assigned open smitty and choose Devices Fixed Disks Change Show Characteristics Assign Physical Volume Identifier In smitty create a volume group Choose System Storage Management Logical Volume Manager Volume Groups Add a Volume Group In smitty create a file system Choose System Storage Management File Systems Add Change Show Delete File Systems Mount the logical volume Chapter 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 33 v To Create HP UX Host Logical Volumes When you are satisfied with your storage configuration you need to create at least one logical volume on the server The following steps are general g
204. ion Back up any existing data to an external device before using the New Configuration command Sun StorEdge Configuration Service automatically initializes new logical drives defined on the array controller 1 Log in as an ssconfig user 2 Select the controller that you want to configure Chapter 4 Full Configuration 49 3 Make sure that you have selected the appropriate Optimization mode for your application Optimization is set in the Cache tab of the Change Controller Parameters window and is set to Sequential by default For steps on how to change the Optimization mode see Cache Tab on page 185 4 Choose Configuration Custom Configure 5 Click New Configuration A New Configuration Warning message is displayed 6 Click OK 7 Verify that the Server and Controller displayed at the top of the window are correct If the server and the controller displayed are not correct click Cancel to exit the New Configuration window and return to the main window Select the appropriate disk controller and reselect New Configuration 8 In the Select disks for Logical Drive list select the first disk and click Add Disk Proceed to add the next two disks so that three disks are displayed in the lower list box If you make a mistake or change your mind select the drive from the drives list and click Remove Disk Note Because the logical drive has not been partitioned yet the Part Size MB and the Available Size
205. ion errors 278 client parameter errors 274 close transport errors 275 communications async errors 277 communications link error 277 communications security errors 277 controller event errors 280 device state errors 274 disk state errors 270 drive side event errors 281 firmware download errors 279 host side event errors 282 initialization state errors 274 internal state errors 273 logical drive event errors 282 283 main communications errors 276 memory allocation errors 275 open transport errors 275 redundancy state errors 273 SAF TE state errors 271 server manage monitor event error 286 system drive state 270 system shutdown errors 279 tape state errors 271 timeout errors 277 transport field errors 276 error messages 286 Event Log 109 directory locations 110 error codes 268 Event Log file 110 Event Log icon 9 Event Log window 110 eventlog txt 109 110 Save Event Log icon 9 severity levels 113 event messages email notification 15 severity levels 16 expanding capacity of logical drive or logical volume calculating maximum drive expand Index 315 capacity 164 F failed drive rebuild 136 fans physical location 98 status 96 firmware upgrading controller 172 hard drives 176 SAF TE devices 177 SES devices 177 FRU definition 107 ID obtaining 107 G global spare drive assigning 192 compared to a local spare drive 221 definition 210 grouping servers 17 group
206. is found an error is reported which enables you to analyze the error and check the integrity of your data before overwriting the parity drive m Rebuild Priority The amount of resources allocated to perform a rebuild low normal improved high Select Change Controller Parameters from the Custom Configuration Options window to change the Rebuild Priority m How Often Specify how often you want the parity checked m Starting Day Specify the day of the week you would like this schedule to start m Starting Time Specify the time on the starting day you would like this schedule to begin m Existing Schedule The current parity schedule logical drive frequency starting day and time m Next Parity Check The date and time you want the next parity check to start 4 When you are satisfied with the schedule click OK v To Scan Physical Disks for Bad Blocks Media Scan The media scan feature sequentially checks each physical drive in a selected logical drive block by block for bad blocks If a bad block is encountered the controller rebuilds the data from the bad block onto a good block if one is available on the physical drive If no good blocks are available on the physical drive the controller designates the physical drive Bad generates an event message and if a spare drive is available begins rebuilding data from the bad physical drive onto the spare Note A firmware menu option called Media Scan at
207. ist box Select the Hardware Filter and Map to Multiple Hosts check boxes and then click OK Note If you deselect the Hardware Filter check box you cannot assign LUN filter mapping you can only assign a standard map v To Add an HBA Device Manually If you do not see the desired HBA device displayed in the left pane under Hosts add it manually through the Configure Host WWN window You can add up to 64 WWNS per array 1 Choose Configuration Configure Host WWN Note If the Configure Host WWN option is not enabled select any one of icons in the left pane to enable it 2 If are not already logged in as ssconfig or ssadmin a password prompt is displayed Type the password and click OK The Configure Host WWN window is displayed Configure Host wWwhN Select SUN StorEdge 3000 Family System SUN StorEdge SN 8009328 v Available Hosts Connected Hosts IPAddress Name IP Address 0s techtest 206 6 181 212 SunOS 5 9 z Remove OK Cancel l Help 3 Under Connected Hosts select the host that you want to add an HBA device to and click Remove Chapter 5 LUN Filtering FC and SATA Only 69 4 Under Available Hosts select the host and click Edit The Add Edit Host window is displayed Add Edit Host SUN StorEdge 3000 Family System SUN StorEdge SN 8009328 Host Info Host Name techtest IP Address 206 6 181 212 OS Suns 5 9 HBAs Info
208. its The sstrapd daemon starts at the next boot or can be started immediately by running the following command sbin init d ssagent start This starts the sstrapd daemon as well as the other two daemons if they are not currently running Only one instance of each daemon is running at this point whether or not any daemons were previously running Appendix E Email and SNMP 257 v To Set Up an IBM AIX Host For an IBM AIX host you can generate SNMP version 1 traps through an interface to an SNMP trap daemon called sstrapd By default this daemon does not start automatically during the boot process The following steps describe how to enable trap processing 1 Create the file var opt SUNWsscs ssagent sstrapd conf using any standard text editor This file must be created with a list of either system names or IP addresses one per line for the SNMP manager consoles The file can contain blank lines and comment lines 2 Edit the file etc ssagent and remove the comment marks from the SNMP related start section These lines are marked by an initial double hash mark 3 Save the file after these edits The sstrapd daemon starts at the next boot or can be started immediately by running the following command etc ssagent uptrap This starts the sstrapd daemon as well as the other two daemons if they are not currently running Only one instance of each daemon is running at this point whether or not any daemons were previous
209. ive 1 Partition 2 2222 MB Map 1 1 2 Logical Drive 3 RAID 0 6000 MB Logical Drive 5 RAID 3 8000 MB ee E Lo J j m L ee Cal Array Ch 2 Id 11 SEAGATE ST336605LSUN36G 34732 MB ae Array Ch 2 Id 12 SEAGATE ST336605LSUN36G 34732 MB al Array Ch 2 Id 13 SEAGATE ST336605LSUN36G 34732 MB a Primary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 666666 Note The SN represents the unique ID of the array 76 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 The following figure shows an example of a collapsed view sun storEdge Th Configuration Service File View Configuration Array Administration Help For more information you can double click an icon to open a component view window The component views are covered later in this chapter Device Status Another feature of the main window is that device status is color coded and symbol coded so that it is easy to identify when a device is in a state that requires attention The status is propagated along the device tree enabling you to trace a failure down to the device level See TABLE 6 1 for device status color and symbol descriptions TABLE 6 1 Device Color and Symbol Status Color Symbol Status Purple None The group server or device is online White None The user has not logged into this server Yellow One or more components of this group or server are not A working but the array is still functional See Degraded State on pa
210. k in 4 sscsconsole v e c EEI CJ bin C1 cfgsavset J hipfiles CJ lib C browser default Ly errlog tet 0 eventlog txt execbr exe File name Files of type All Files 114 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 3 Type a file name to identify the file and click Save The program writes the report on the inventory and status of the selected server and its devices The default save location for the report file is in the installation directory and the default file extension is xm1 It might be helpful to create a subdirectory for saving reports so they do not clutter up the installation directory A report includes the following information m General array details Array name status manufacturer model a Firmware version a Boot record version a MAC IP netmask and gateway address a Serial numbers of controllers m General overview of the array configuration Total number of logical drives logical volumes and partitions Controller parameters Host and drive channel settings and IDs m Detailed list of each logical drive RAID level Number and size of physical drives in a logical drive Number and size of partitions per logical drive and their mappings m SAF TE SES information m List of FRUs m Details of the physical drives Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 115 The following excerpt is from an example report for a Sun
211. l volume in the Maximum Drive Expand Capacity field and click OK The capacity shown in the Maximum Available Drive Free Capacity field is the maximum available free disk space per physical drive based on the smallest physical drive in the logical drive The capacity you specify is added to each physical drive in the logical drive As described in the following examples the total amount of capacity that is added to the logical drive is calculated automatically based on the RAID level Note Spare drives are not included when expanding a logical drive Do not include spare drives when calculating maximum drive expand capacity m RAID 0 Multiply the amount entered in the Maximum Drive Expand Capacity field by the total number of physical drives contained in the logical drive For example 100 Mbyte x 3 300 Mbyte total capacity added to the logical drive m RAID 1 Multiply the amount entered in the Maximum Drive Expand Capacity field by the total number of physical drives contained in the logical drive and then divide by two to account for mirroring For example 100 Mbyte x 4 400 Mbyte 400 2 200 Mbyte total capacity added to the logical drive 164 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 m RAID 3 and 5 Multiply the amount entered in the Maximum Drive Expand Capacity field c by the total number of physical drives contained in the logical drive and then subtract c to account for parity
212. le defective drive slot Temperature change from TemperatureC to TemperatureC The background command s has finished The background command s has been aborted The battery on Ch d Id d is expired on s Please install a new battery Battery Information is s The battery on Ch d Id d is going to expire on s after d days Please install a new battery before the current battery expires Battery Information is s The changer mechanism is having difficulty communicating with the tape drive Turn the autoloader off then on and restart the operation If the problem persists call the tape drive supplier helpline 296 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 TABLE G 33 Error Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages The configuration has been updated The configuration was successfully updated If new LDs LVs were created the server may need to be rebooted The Controller devices list changed The controller parameters have been updated The current user is ssconfig you cannot log in again The daemons are not responding The device does not belong to the same HBA card The operations cannot continue The disks list changed The drive letter mounted point cannot be assigned The encrypt key is empty The firmware does not support multiple IP assignment mechanisms The firmware download failed because you have tried to use the incorrect firmware for this tape
213. lect the logical drive for which you are going to perform the copy and replace operation 5 Select the Copy and Replace Drive tab on the Dynamically Grow and or Reconfigure LDs LVs window 6 From the Drive to Copy Data From list select the new hard drive 7 From the Drive to Copy Data To list select the hard drive that is going to be replaced and click OK Dynamically Grow and or Reconfigure LOs LWS Server 206 235 238 522 B52 Controler Primar SUN StorEdge 3310 ShMFEBEREE Select a LOVL Assignment Status Primary Good 4000 MB Primary Good 12000 ME Primary Good 4000 MEB Expand LOVLY Add SCSI Drives Copy and Replace Drive Drive to Copy Data From Drive to Copy Data To Capacity Capacity 0 2 34732 MB 34732 MB 0 3 34732 MB 34732 MB 34732 MB The operation is to copy amp replace diski 2 with diski0 1 0 o ee J e 8 Click OK in the Confirm Configuration Operation window to complete the operation and click Close 9 When the operation is complete close the progress window Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 169 170 10 To use the additional capacity provided by the new drives follow the instructions in To Expand the Capacity of a Logical Drive or Logical Volume on page 164 The Logical Drive Logical Volume Number For important information regarding the logical drive logical volume number displayed in the LD LV field in the Dynamically Grow and or Reconfigure LDs LVs window see
214. lgorithm to implement fault tolerance There are several RAID level choices RAID 0 1 3 5 1 0 3 0 30 and 5 0 50 RAID levels 1 3 and 5 are the most commonly used The following table provides a brief overview of the RAID levels TABLE A 1 RAID Level Overview Number of Drives RAID Level Description Supported Capacity Redundancy 0 Striping 2 36 N No 1 Mirroring 2 N 2 Yes 1 0 Mirroring and 4 36 even number N 2 Yes striping only 3 Striping with 3 31 N 1 Yes dedicated parity 5 Striping with 3 31 N 1 Yes distributed parity 3 0 30 Striping of RAID 3 2 8 logical drives N of Yes logical drives logical drives 5 0 50 Striping of RAID 5 2 8 logical drives N of Yes logical drives logical drives Capacity refers to the total number N of physical drives available for data storage For example if the capacity is N 1 and the total number of disk drives in the logical drive is six 36 Mbyte drives the disk space available for storage is equal to five disk drives 5 x 36 Mbyte or 180 Mbyte The 1 refers to the amount of striping across six drives which provides redundancy of data and is equal to the size of one of the disk drives 214 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 For RAID 3 0 30 and 5 0 50 capacity refers to the total number of physical drives N minus one physical drive for each logical drive in the volume For example if the total number of disk drives in the log
215. ling parity check 130 SCSI channel definition 211 SCSI drives adding to logical drive 167 SCSI I O Timeout Sec field 191 SCSI Motor Spin Up field 191 Select Configuration File window 30 63 Select Controller Progress window 138 Server List Setup window 204 server not responding 259 Server Setup window 205 servers Add Server Properties 13 Add Server window 13 205 251 add to Managed Servers list 12 assign to controller through console 21 Available Servers list 205 250 deleting 18 Edit Server window 205 251 261 editing 204 inventory 82 Managed Servers list 205 261 managing 17 manually deleting managing server using terminal 24 147 organize into groups 17 Server List Setup command 204 Server List Setup function 237 250 Server List Setup icon 9 Server List Setup procedure 12 Server List Setup window 261 Server Login window 20 Server Setup 261 Server Setup window 204 250 261 setup to send traps 253 TCP IP address for server 14 View Server command 84 View Server window 85 86 Service Configuration window 254 SES email notification of event messages 15 Set Controller Config field 195 Severity field 268 severity levels events 113 silencing environmental alarms 96 Simple Mail Transport Protocol SMTP 252 SMART monitoring enabling 26 SMTP e mail messages 245 SN 76 SNMP agents and managers 247 how it works 246 identifying objects 247 Management Information Base 247
216. ller Mute Controller Beeper Deassert Failed Redundant Controller Performance Statistics Get Controller Boot Time oo een 4 If upgrading firmware only not boot record select the Download Firmware option The Select Firmware File window is displayed Select Firmware File Lookin Csscsconsoie a et E ke browser default y errlog tet eventlog tet execbrexe File name i Open Files of type Al Files Cancel Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 173 5 Select the firmware you want to download and click Open The Confirmation Dialog prompt is displayed Confirmation Dialog A WARNING Do you wantto download firmware to the controller 6 Click Yes The firmware download to the RAID controller displays a progress bar Downloading Firmware to the RAID Controller Fa Server 206 6 181 242 Tomcat Controller Ch 0 ID 2 Sun StorEdge Downloading Firmware to the RAID Controller in Progress 7 When the progress bar reaches 100 click OK 8 After the firmware has been downloaded check the settings to make sure they are configured correctly 174 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 v 1 Zs 4 5 6 7 To Upgrade Firmware and Boot Record Choose Array Administration Controller Maintenance If you are not already logged in as ssconfig
217. ller Reset _ Mute Beeper Channel RS 232 i Cache if Disk Array if Drive IF Host liF if Redundancy i Peripheral i Network f Protocol Protocol Enabled Port Inactivity Timeout Period TELNET 45 rnin HTTP HTTPS FTP SSH PriAgentalll SNMP DHCP NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA SI SI IS CL CL LI Ls OK Cancel Help 200 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 2 Select which protocols to enable or disable The protocols are enabled or disabled by default as follows m TELNET Telnet access to the IP address is enabled a HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol access is disabled m HTTPS Hypertext Transport Protocol Secure access is disabled m FIP File Transfer Protocol access is disabled m SSH Secure Socket Handling protocol access is disabled m PriAgentAll The internal communication protocol used by the controller is enabled Note The PriAgentAll protocol must remain enabled for Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and the CLI to receive information from the controller firmware Do not disable this protocol m SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol access is disabled SNMP might be used to communicate with external management software DHCP The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol access is enabled DHCP is used in some networks to dynamically assign IP addresses to systems on the network m Ping Ping enable
218. ller list select none and click Apply Click Close to confirm Select the server you want to manage the controller following the steps in To Assign a Server to Manage a Controller on page 21 To Manually Delete a Server Using the Terminal Window Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for your array for information about accessing the firmware application From the Main Menu choose view and edit Host luns Edit Host ID WWN Name List gt sscsMer Delete Host ID WWN Name List Choose Yes to confirm To Configure Agent Parameters Agent parameters specify how you want to connect to your storage This section provides steps to configure parameters such as polling time periodic device discovery time smart monitoring out of band storage management and enabling JBOD support From the main window choose View Agent Options Management The Agent Options Management window is displayed Note Agent Options Management might not be available if one or more groups are configured and one of them is selected in the main window To enable it select an icon other than a group and click View 24 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Z Agent Options Management Sener 206 6 181 212 techtest Monitoring Frequency in Secs Polling Time Acceptable Range 5to 1200 Secs Periodic Device Discovery Time in Minutes 0 to disable
219. location 110 SNMP traps 256 stopping console 11 loading configuration See restoring logical drive configuration local spare drive compared to a global spare drive 220 definition 210 logging in 19 logging out 19 logical drive adding 150 adding SCSI drives 167 creating a partition 160 definition 210 deleting 157 deleting a partition 162 drive allocation 211 expanding capacity 164 maximum number of drives for RAID level 51 Partitions box 61 restoring configuration 140 saving configuration 29 View Logical Drive command 93 logical drive number 158 logical volume creating 57 153 definition 210 no logical drives listed 261 logical volumes avoiding 38 LUN assignments maximum 60 maximum number 38 LUN filter accessing LUN Filter view 67 adding HBA device manually 69 mapping logical drive to host 72 74 overview 65 removing standard mapping 71 LUNs 31 adding 61 Change Host LUN Assignments 60 deleting 62 Host LUN Assignments box 62 LUN detailed information 87 LUNs Per Host parameter 193 M main window 76 Major field 268 Managed Servers list setup 17 Managing storage through the web 123 mapping partition to LUN description 213 Max Queued IO Count field 193 maximum drive expand capacity 164 media scan 44 59 133 155 member drives copying and replacing 168 menu bar overview 8 97 message variables 286 MIB 247 Microsoft Cluster Server MSCS 233 Microsoft Windows OS c
220. logical volume or partition it click Commit 16 To create a small logical drive type 2000 in the Max Drive Size field Note A total of 4000 Mbyte is shown for the logical drive size as opposed to 6000 Mbyte because this is a RAID 5 level you lose the capacity equal to 1 drive 2000 Mbyte for parity Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 New Configuration Server 206 235 238 104 104 Manufacture Select disks for Logical Drive Capacity Model b 1336752F SUNS6G EB 1336752F SUN36G Add Disk Make Standby k 34476 MB 34476 MB SEAGATE SEAGATE Logical Drive 0 Definition Remove Disk Capacity 34476 MB 34476 MB 0 34476 MB New LD Add to LY _ On line Initialization Stipe Size 128 KB Defaul Max Drive Size MB 2000 RAID Level Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8000568 LY 0 Definition LD Part Definition LD Total 1 Part Part Size 0 4000 MB Available Size MB 4000 Part Size mB 4000 LD 0 Map Channel Host Ch O FC gt v ID PID 40 v 3 disk using 103428 MB Write Policy Default Vrite back Write a new label to the new LD Commit Cancel Help 17 To create a partition type 1000 in the Part Size field and click Add Partition Note Do not partition a logical drive if you plan on adding it to a logical volume Once a logical driv
221. ly running Sending SNMP Traps Without Using Sun StorEdge Configuration Service For an alternative method for sending SNMP traps that does not require Sun StorEdge Configuration Service refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide 258 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 APPENDIX F Troubleshooting This chapter provides troubleshooting suggestions for the following symptoms Symptom A server is not responding or a server may be down on page 260 Symptom No logical drives are listed when trying to add a logical volume from existing logical drives on page 261 Symptom An IP address of a server in a DHCP environment has changed on page 261 Symptom Traps are not received from a server on page 262 Symptom HP OpenView won t install or the trap daemon won t start on page 262 Symptom The console does not show changes when hardware is added or replaced on page 263 Symptom Logical drive is not present on a Solaris host on page 263 Symptom Environmental alarms are not being reported on page 263 Symptom Cannot silence the alarm on page 264 Symptom The console appears to run slowly on page 264 Symptom Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter stops working on page 264 Symptom UNIX OS The online help is not displayed on page 265 259 Symptom A server is not responding or a server m
222. m Drive State on page 270 Disk State on page 270 SAF TE State on page 271 Tape State on page 271 Redundancy State on page 273 Internal State on page 273 Device State on page 274 Initialization State on page 274 Invalid Client Parameter on page 274 Open Transport on page 275 Close Transport on page 275 Memory Allocation on page 275 RaidCard fault detected See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field Transport on page 276 Main Communications on page 276 Communication Link on page 277 Communications Async on page 277 Communications Security on page 277 Timeout on page 277 Administration on page 278 Firmware on page 279 System Shutdown on page 279 Dynamic Growth fault detected See Error Field See Error Field See Error Field Set Config on page 280 Controller Event on page 280 Drive Side Event on page 281 Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 269 TABLE G 3 Minor Field 1F 20 23 2B Minor Field Continued Description See Error Field Host Side Event on page 282 See Error Field Logical Drive Event on page 282 See Server Manage Monitor Event Error on page 286 See Error Field Generalized Target Event on page 283 Error Field System
223. make changes to the existing configuration see Updating the Configuration on page 149 Full configuration includes the following topics a Configuring Logical Drives and Logical Volumes on page 38 To Use Standard Configuration on page 39 To Use Custom Configuration on page 44 To Create and Partition a Logical Volume on page 57 To Clear a Configuration on page 59 To Log Out of the Configuration Level on page 60 m Host LUN Assignments on page 60 a To Add or Change Map a Host LUN on page 61 a To Delete Unmap a Host LUN on page 62 m Configuration File on page 62 a To Save a Configuration to a Backup File on page 63 For the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array or the Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array if you are planning to set up a cluster configuration see Using the Cluster Configuration SCSI Only on page 233 The Configuration menu commands and toolbar icons might be temporarily disabled if an array administration process such as parity checking is running The menu command is also deactivated when the console is refreshing its inventory on the server A satellite dish symbol is attached to the server icon during the refresh process Caution Back up any existing data to an external device before configuring the array Reconfiguration overwrites any existing logical drive configuration When the existing logical drive configuration is overwritten all data is effectiv
224. me To create a partition type the partition size in the Part Size field and click Add Partition To create multiple partitions of the same size click Add Partition as many times as partitions you want to create You can also type the partition size in the Part Size field and multiply it by the number of partitions you want to create for example 100 128 As you add partitions the remaining capacity displayed in Available Size MB decreases by the amount of the partition size When you have finished adding logical drives to the logical volume to create another logical volume or an individual logical drive click Commit LV When you are finished creating logical volumes and do not want to create an individual logical drive click Commit 58 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Note When you have finished creating logical volumes and want to exit the New Configuration window if you accidentally click Commit LV instead of Commit you will have to create another logical drive otherwise you have to click Cancel and configure the logical volume again To add or delete a logical volume to or partition a logical volume in an existing configuration see Updating the Configuration on page 149 7 HP UX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to run the ioscan fnC disk command Note If you used Syst
225. mically Grow and or Reconfigure LDs LVs window see The Logical Drive Logical Volume Number on page 158 166 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 v To Add Physical Drives to an Existing Logical Drive 1 Select the array that you want to configure 2 Choose Configuration Custom Configure 3 Select Dynamically Grow and or Reconfigure LDs LVs from the Custom Configuration Options window 4 Select the logical drive to which you want to add a drive 5 Select the Add SCSI Drives tab 6 From the list of Available disks select the drive you want to add to the logical drive 7 Click Add Disk The drive is moved to the Add disk s to LD list If you make a mistake or change your mind select the disk from the Add disk s to LD list and click Remove 8 When you are finished adding the drives click OK Dynamically Grow and or Reconfigure LDs LVs Server 206 235 238 562 B52 Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 666666 Selecta LD LY LD LY Drvs Parts RAID Assignment Status Size L 0 1 NA Primary Goo 480 MB LD 1 4 5 Primary Good 240 MB LD 2 1 5 Primary Good 260 MB IE i e rE raS LA mema Expand LD LY Add SCSI Drives Copy and Replace Drive Available disks Add disk s to LD Add Disk Ch ID Capacity 34732 MB 34732 MB 34732 MB No operation Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 167 9 Click OK i
226. minimum value Chapter 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 25 4 For Interval of trap generation for an event type the amount of time in seconds between the sending of each trap message If the value is 60 seconds or greater a message is sent at that interval for that particular trap until the event is cleared or corrected For example if a fan fails a message regarding that fan failure is sent every 60 seconds until fixed If the value is 0 Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and therefore Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter sends only one message regarding that particular event For example if a fan fails only one email is sent 5 For Timeout of heartbeat lost set the amount of time in minutes to wait between the sending of failed server messages The default value is 15 minutes the value range is 1 to 30 minutes 6 To Enable SMART Monitoring select the check box SMART monitoring is a method for hard drives to report predicted failures Most disk vendors supply drives with this feature The agent monitors this feature by issuing an unsolicited request sense SMART monitoring can be turned off if this request causes conflicts with the underlying host operating system device drivers For more information on SMART monitoring refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for your array 7 To Enable JBOD support see Io Enable JBOD Support on page 26 8 The parameters und
227. ministration or configuration level you are given the option of logging out to the monitoring mode or logging out from the server entirely Server Logout Sener 206 235 236 70 E3000 fe Logoutto monitoring mode 3 Logout fromthe server ox cama oe Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 v To Assign a Server to Manage a Controller To manage and monitor an array the agent needs to have access to a host logical unit number LUN mapped to a partition of a logical drive assigned to the primary controller of the array The agent ignores all host LUNs mapped to a partition of a logical drive assigned to a secondary controller in a redundant configuration of an array See RAID Basics on page 209 for a discussion of logical drives and LUNs Note If the same array is connected to multiple servers it is possible to have the agent running on each of these servers trying to manage and monitor the same array Due to a restriction on monitoring commands sent to the array controller by only one server at a time some monitoring commands might fail if sent simultaneously by multiple servers This could cause inaccurate reporting or the processes to stop responding To prevent this from happening the agent can be configured to enable and disable array monitoring on a server Perform the following procedure to assign a server to manage an array Note Sun StorEdge Configuration Service
228. mmand IBM AIX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to update the Object Data Manager ODM as explained in Updating the Object Data Manager on an IBM AIX Host on page 206 Add LDs L s to the Current Configuration Sener 206 6 181 121 tech2 Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8009328 C Use existing LDs to create Ls Select disks for Logical Drive rL 0 Definition If no logical drives are LD ChID Capacity Manufacture LD listed after you select Use existing LDs to create LVs the logical drives have not been unmapped You must first unmap the logical drives Commit L y rLogical Drive 1 Definition Part Definition LD1 Total 1 Part Remove Disk Max Drive Size MB Part Size Ch ID 2 10 Capacity 34476 MB RAID Level 34476 MB 34476 0 68952 MB o0 O1 O3 O85 Available Size mB 68952 Part Size MB 68952 LD 1 Map iv On line Initialization Channel Host Ch O FC Stripe Size 32 KB Default x SCSI ID PID 40 NewLD Addtoly ce Write Policy DefaultWrite back Add Partition Write a new label to the new LD Commit Cancel Help Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 10 11 To Delete a Logical Drive or Logical Volume Use t
229. more requests to find out the current status of the network entity or launching an application Management Information Base MIB On a network each device instrumented by SNMP agents has one or more variables or objects associated with it An example of a typical variable might be one that keeps track of the name of the device These variables or objects are described in a text file called Management Information Base MIB A MIB is a precise textual definition of variables being managed The procedures for defining a MIB have been established by the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF of the International Standards Organization ISO SNMP Objects Some variables for network management are common to all LAN network devices Many of these variables have been standardized and are referred to as MIB II variables and MIB II extensions The IETF has also defined the procedures for MIBs that are not in a standard MIB II category These variables are listed in private enterprise MIBs Appendix E EmailandSNMP 247 Variables are listed under the entry of the private enterprise MIB For example the object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 2294 1 2 refers to an object ID or OID of a variable for keeping track of the agent version under one of Configuration Service s MIBs The chart in FIGURE E 1 shows how the OID was derived The check marks indicate the nodes in the OID In a MIB the data of a specific variable or object resides below its OID Sun s tree
230. more servers Log in as ssconfig user and then try the operation again Access denied for one or more servers Please log in as an ssadmin user and then try the operation again Active trap events is empty Add Physical drive d d has started on logical drive LogicalDrive Add Physical drive has completed on logical drive LogicalDrive Add SCSI Drive into Logical Drive information Agent Name is empty An error occurred while getting data from the server An HBA card with this WWN already exists Another instance of this program is already running Array Admin in Progress At least one email address needs to be configured Attempted to load a cartridge type not supported by this drive The cartridge has been automatically ejected Attempted to load an unsupported tape format Attempted to write to a write protected cartridge Remove the write protection or use another tape Audible alarm has an unknown status Audible alarm has been triggered Audible alarm has been turned off Background check or rebuild operation in progress Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 287 TABLE G 33 Error Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Background initialization in progress Background parity check in progress Background rebuild operation in progress Battery Expiration Monitoring of Ch d Id d is not available Cannot accept the incoming connection Cannot allocate memory Cannot bind TCP port with the opene
231. n including setting or changing controller IDs and parameters and defining or modifying RAID sets and standby drives Note The Configuration menu commands and toolbar icons might be temporarily disabled if an array administration process such as parity checking is running The menu command is also deactivated when the console is refreshing its inventory on the server A satellite dish symbol is attached to the server icon during the refresh process Chapter 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 9 Tabs Located below the toolbar tabs enable you to quickly move to other Sun StorEdge Configuration Service views TABLE 3 2 Main Window Tabs Tab Description Click to go to the main Sun StorEdge Configuration Service i Main view window Click to go to LUN Filter View Fibre Channel and SATA only Filter View Device Icons See To Verify Storage Configurations on page 27 for a description of typical device icons displayed for a configured array Physical Hard Drives As the array becomes fully configured the main window displays multiple components The physical drives that make up the logical drives are displayed by default however to make the main window more manageable to navigate you can choose not to display the physical hard drives by deselecting View Display HDD under LD Navigating The program follows standard Java programming language keyboard and navigation opera
232. n the Confirm Configuration Operation window to complete the operation and click Close The Logical Drive Logical Volume Number For important information regarding the logical drive logical volume number displayed in the LD LV field in the Dynamically Grow and or Reconfigure LDs LVs window see The Logical Drive Logical Volume Number on page 158 v To Copy and Replace Physical Drives You can copy and replace existing physical drives with drives of the same or higher capacity Because the logical drive uses the capacity size of its smallest drive all drives must be replaced with drives of the same or higher capacity For example as shown FIGURE 8 1 a logical drive that originally contains three 36 Gbyte member drives can be replaced with new 73 Gbyte member drives Note To use the additional capacity provided by drives with higher capacity you need to expand the capacity as explained in To Expand the Capacity of a Logical Drive or Logical Volume on page 164 TOLEI 36 GB 36 GB 36 GB New drive New drive New drive RAID 5 72 GB 73 GB 73 GB 73 GB 73 GB 73 GB 73 GB RAID 5 146 GB FIGURE 8 1 Copying and Replacing Physical Drives 168 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 1 Select the array that you want to configure 2 Choose Configuration Custom Configure 3 Select Dynamically Grow and or Reconfigure LDs LVs from the Custom Configuration Options window 4 Se
233. naled File System 230 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 9 Select the volume group and set the field Run the command umount mount point Appendix B Monitoring JBODs 231 232 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 APPENDIX C Using the Cluster Configuration SCSI Only For the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array if you are using Win32 Sun StorEdge Configuration Service can monitor shared SCSI storage This section covers the following topics m Planning the Cluster Configuration on page 233 a Cluster Configuration Requirements on page 234 a To Set Up Cluster Configuration on page 234 A cluster configuration must be set up with the appropriate hardware first and it also requires Windows 2000 or 2003 Server and Microsoft Cluster Server MSCS software If you are planning to set up a cluster configuration make sure to read this chapter Planning the Cluster Configuration Before you set up a cluster configuration you need to determine what type of configuration you want because it can make a difference in how you configure the storage initially There are two main types of cluster configuration a A hot standby server cluster where all of the LUNs belong to one of the two servers in the cluster If the server owning the LUNs fails the LUNs are moved to the second server which has been idle to this point A minimum of two
234. nd HP UX OS this file is located in opt SUNWsscs ssagent On an IBM AIX OS this file is located in usr SUNWsscs ssagent On Microsoft Windows this file is located in Program Files Sun ssagent 246 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 Agents and Managers The SNMP software model consists of agents and managers An agent is the software that enables variables in the managed device to be monitored The agent software is either embedded in the device that is managed or running on a computer to which the device is connected The manager or management console is the network monitoring software that uses SNMP to send requests to the agents about the variables The manager polls the agents periodically because the values of variables change SNMP managers typically analyze the data received from the agents and make it available to the user in a graphical display The data can be stored in a database for historical and trend analysis In addition to responding to the SNMP manager s requests agents can send unsolicited notifications or traps to the management station This is similar to interrupts in conventional software Management consoles can take various actions in response to a trap Usually traps are logged and the information in them is forwarded through a notification scheme to the interested user Traps can also cause the SNMP manager to initiate further action such as querying the agent with
235. ndition ended Low RPM condition ended High RPM condition ended General UPS State Change Notification General UPS Failure Detected AC Line Failure Detected DC Line Failure Detected Battery Failure Detected General UPS State Change Critical 284 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 TABLE G 30 Generalized Target Event Errors Continued Error Field Description 28 General UPS Failure condition ended 29 AC Line Failure condition ended 2A DC Line Failure condition ended 2B Battery Failure condition ended 2C General UPS State Change Notification 2D General Voltage Alert 2E High Voltage Warning 2F Low Voltage Warning 30 High Voltage Critical 31 Low Voltage Critical 32 General Voltage State Change Critical 33 General Village Alert ended 34 High Voltage condition ended 35 Low Voltage condition ended 36 General Voltage State Change Notification 37 General Current Alert 38 High Current Warning 39 High Current Critical 3A General Current State Change Critical 3B General Current Alert ended 3C High Current condition ended 3D General Current State Change Notification 3E Door is unlocked 3F General Door State Change Critical 40 Door is now locked 41 General Door State Change Notification Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 285 Server Manage Monitor Event Error TABLE G 31 Server Manage Monitor Event Error Error Field 01 Description Server to Manage Monitor has chan
236. nfiguration CLUSTER TXT 237 IP addresses 237 Microsoft Cluster Server software 234 planning 233 requirements 234 setup 234 start Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 234 236 Community String checking 253 configuration caution 37 Change Host LUN Assignments window 61 clear button 59 clearing 59 Confirm Configuration Operation window 43 Custom Configuration 44 Custom Configure 44 Custom Configure command 179 202 Load Configuration Confirmation window 142 Load Configuration window 141 loading 140 logging out of ssconfig 60 logical drive saving 29 Logical Drive Partitions box 61 new before you use 46 New Configuration 50 New Configuration option 46 New Configuration warning 49 restoring 140 Saveset Description tab 141 saving 29 62 saving logical drive configuration 62 Security Configuration window 254 Security tab 254 Select Configuration File window 140 selecting RAID level 47 setting traps 254 Standard Configuration 39 Standard Configuration window 41 Standard Configure 40 Use a standby drive check box 42 verifying 27 console devices not displayed 263 email setup 250 running slowly 264 controller assigning managing server through the console 21 converting from dual to single 147 event errors 280 muting 144 parameters changing 179 resetting 143 180 selecting server to manage 21 Controller Array Progress window 138 139 Controller Assignment command 21 Contr
237. nfiguration or after the logical volume has been created v To Prepare for Logical Drives Larger Than 253 Gbyte The Solaris OS requires drive geometry for various operations including newfs For the appropriate drive geometry to be presented to the Solaris OS for logical drives larger than 253 Gbyte you have to configure Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration using the firmware application Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for your array for information about accessing the firmware application 1 In the firmware application choose view and edit Configuration parameters gt Host Side Parameters Host Cylinder Head Sector Mapping Configuration gt Sector Ranges Variable and then choose Yes to confirm your choice 2 Choose Head Ranges and specify 64 3 Choose Cylinder Ranges and specify Variable Note Refer to your operating system documentation for limitations on device sizes v To Create and Partition a Logical Drive Using New Configuration Before you create and partition a logical drive using New Configuration for the first time it is useful to review the steps under Before You Use New Configuration on page 46 The following steps provide a working example of how to create a new configuration for a new logical drive Three logical drives are selected and configured into a RAID 5 logical drive A small logical drive is then created and partitioned Caut
238. ng server following the steps in To Assign a Server to Manage a Controller on page 21 122 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Managing Storage Through the Web The web based storage management capability enables you to conveniently manage the array through the web The following steps describe how to set up the array for web based management and how to access it through a web browser Note This feature requires Sun StorEdge Enterprise Storage Manager Topology Reporter included in the Sun StorEdge Enterprise Storage Manager software to be installed on a Solaris host Refer to the Other Supported Software section in the release notes for your array for more information Note This feature is not supported on a Linux host that is if the agent has been installed on a Linux host the Configure Web Server option on the Custom Configure window is unavailable You can use a Linux host web browser to load the console but the agent must be installed on a system running the Solaris OS Web Browser Requirements Sun StorEdge Enterprise Storage Manager Topology Reporter can be viewed through a URL on any machine connected to the same network you must have an account on the Solaris host machine UNIX OS TABLE 6 7 Minimum Web Browser Requirements for UNIX OS Web Browser Java Plug in Netscape Navigator 4 79 Java Plug in 1 2 2 Mozilla 2 1 Java Plug in 1 2 Note For the I
239. ng the logical drive while performing I O operations initializing a logical drive on line requires more time than off line initialization If you do not select On line initialization you can configure and use the drive only after initialization is complete Because the controller is building the logical drive without having to also perform I O operations off line initialization requires less time than on line initialization 10 Select the stripe size Select a Default value to assign the stripe size per Optimization mode as specified in TABLE 4 2 or select a different stripe size TABLE 4 2 Default Stripe Size Per Optimization Mode RAID Level Sequential I O Random I O 0 1 5 128 32 3 16 4 Once the stripe size is selected and data is written to logical drives the only way to change the stripe size of an individual logical drive is to back up all its data to another location delete the logical drive and create a logical drive with the stripe size that you want 42 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 11 12 13 Specify Default Write through or Write back as the Write Policy for the logical drive The write policy determines when cached data is written to the disk drives The ability to hold data in cache while it is being written to disk can increase storage device speed during sequential reads Write policy options include write through and write back Using write through
240. nition LD Size Part Definition LDG Total 1 Part Part Size Port size 0 1000 MB 1 3000 MB 4000 PartSize mb 4000 LD 0 Map E ID PID 40 v Available Size M B Channel Host Ch O FC Commit Cancel Help 18 Solaris OS only If you want the new logical drive to be automatically labeled which enables the OS to use the drive click Write a new label to the new LD 19 Click Commit to end the configuration of the logical drive or New LD to configure another logical drive When you click New LD any available disks that haven t been used are displayed When the logical drive configuration for this array is complete click Commit and then click OK The completed configuration is displayed Note You cannot change a logical drive configuration after you click OK Note During initialization LD LV size is displayed as 0 Mbyte 20 HP UX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to run the ioscan fnC disk command 56 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 21 Note If you used System Administrator Manager sam to unmount the file system make sure it is closed before running the ioscan command IBM AIX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to update the Object Data Manager ODM
241. node is 2294 Every private enterprise wanting to develop agents to recognize its own devices can apply to the IETF for its own tree node SNMP Request Types The SNMP operations that support accessing MIB data are Get GetNext and Set Get retrieves a scalar value from a table entry field value given an index value GetNext is used to traverse the instances of table entries with each command returning the next sequential value in the column or field of interest The Set operation is used to create or change the value of a MIB variable SNMP Security Setting values raises the issue of security SNMP V1 version 1 has a simple security scheme Each protocol data unit PDU contains a community string which is like a combination of user name and password Each agent can be configured for a particular community string An agent does not respond to a request sent to it except when the community string in the request PDU matches the community string in its own configuration 248 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 y sv Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 2294 1 2 y internet 1 directory 1 system 1 interfaces gt at 3 ip 4 s tcp 6 udp 7 egp 8 transmission 10 snmp 11 Checkmarks indicate the nodes in the OID experimental experimental 3 private 4 enterprises 1 __ART 2294 i mib agentVersion 2 f FIGURE E 1 Object Identifier of
242. ntact your MIS department for assistance 5 Make sure that the correct server name and password are specified If the name or password is not correct make the correction by editing the entries See the Administrative User Security Levels and Guidelines section for your OS in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Installation Guide The password has to be the one established through the procedure for setting up users m Make sure the users Ssmon ssadmin ssconfig were set up properly 260 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 a If you are using a naming service NIS or NIS in a UNIX OS make sure that the users have been correctly added to the naming service Symptom No logical drives are listed when trying to add a logical volume from existing logical drives If you do not see any logical drives listed under Select a Logical Drive the logical drives have not been unmapped and therefore are unavailable to select You must unmap the logical drives first Symptom An IP address of a server in a DHCP environment has changed In a DHCP environment there is a remote possibility of a server s IP address changing if the server has been offline for longer than three days In these cases the console must be notified of the new IP address of the server because the console communicates with the server through its IP address To remedy this situation the server s new IP address needs
243. ntroller Failed Controller Power Supply Failed Controller Fan Failed Controller Temperature Alert Controller UPS AC Power Loss Controller Initialization Complete Controller Power Supply Back Online Controller Fan Back Online Controller Temperature Normal Controller UPS AC Power Back On Controller RCC SDRAM error Controller Battery 280 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 Error Field Drive Side Event TABLE G 27 Drive Side Event Errors Error Field 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B OC OD OE OF 10 11 12 13 14 Description Drive Channel Select Timeout Drive Channel SCSI Bus Error Drive Channel Unexpected Disconnect Drive Channel Negotiation Error Drive Channel Target Timed Out Drive Channel Parity Error Drive Channel Data Under Or Overrun Drive Channel Undefined Error Drive Channel SCSI Bus Reset Issued Drive Channel Not Ready Error Drive Channel Target HW Error Drive Channel Target Media Error Drive Channel Unexpected Unit Attention Drive Channel Unexpected Sense Data Drive Channel Block Reassign Fail Drive Channel Block Reassign Success Drive Channel SCSI Aborted Command Drive Channel SCSI Channel Fail Drive Channel Smart Fail Drive Channel Scan SCSI Drive Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 281 Error Field Host Side Event TABLE G 28 Host Side Event Errors Error Field Description 01 Host Channel SCSI Bus Reset 02 Host Channel SCSI Bus Device Re
244. o spanned logical drives are presented to the operating system as one logical drive standby drive A drive that is marked as a spare to support automatic data rebuilding after a physical drive associated with a logical drive fails For a standby drive to take the place of another drive it must be at least equal in size to the failed drive and all of the logical drives dependent on the failed disk must be redundant RAID 1 1 0 3 and 5 state The current operational status of a disk drive a logical drive or controller The RAID array stores the states of drives logical drives and the controller in its nonvolatile memory This information is retained across power interruptions stripe size The amount of data in kilobytes that is striped across each physical drive in a logical drive Generally large stripe sizes are more effective for arrays with sequential reads striping The storing of sequential blocks of incoming data on all the different physical drives in a logical drive This method of writing data increases the disk array throughput because multiple drives are working simultaneously retrieving and storing RAID 0 1 0 3 and 5 and all use striping 310 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 terminator UPS volume write back cache write policy write through cache WWN A part used to end a SCSI bus Terminators prevent energy from reflecting back into a cable plant by abso
245. of your document with your feedback Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide part number 817 3337 17 xxiv Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 CHAPTER 1 Introduction This section provides a brief overview of Sun StorEdge Configuration Service features Note For brevity Sun StorEdge Configuration Service is sometimes referred to as the program Sun StorEdge Configuration Service is a sophisticated program based on the Java programming language which brings together storage configuration maintenance and monitoring tools into one application for centralized administration of the array From a single console located on a network system administrators can initialize network storage change configurations monitor status and schedule routine maintenance through an intuitive graphical user interface GUI Administrators can also dynamically allocate reallocate or expand capacity as storage requirements continually change with evolving network wide storage demands In the event of a change in status the program sends alerts by console display email or alphanumeric pager It can also send alerts to any Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP enterprise manager for example HP OpenView Sun StorEdge Configuration Service consists of two components m Sun StorEdge Configuration Service agent Monitors attached disk storage devices and reports their
246. oller Maintenance Options window 143 144 145 173 201 controller parameters saving changes 180 Controller Reset check box 181 195 copying member drives 168 critical device status 77 Custom Configuration 44 Custom Configuration icon 9 314 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 D degraded device status 77 deleting 162 logical drive 157 partition 162 devices detailed view information 83 determining status 77 not appearing in console 263 rebuilding 137 DHCP environment 261 Diagnostic Reporter troubleshooting 264 Disable dynamic IP assignment 200 Disk Access Latency field 191 Disk Array tab 189 disk capacities 48 79 Display HDD under LD check box 10 documentation how book is organized xx Drive Check Period Sec field 192 Drive I F tab 190 drive rebuild 136 137 drives assigning global spares 192 copying and replacing 168 make change standby 202 Physical Drive Standby State window 203 rebuilding 138 scanning in new 170 E editing available servers 204 email Add Server 252 event message notification 15 Mail Address entry box 252 Mail Server Setup window 252 Mailing Lists 251 Mailing Lists highlighted 251 Mailing Lists tab 15 messages 250 Severity entry box 252 SMTP email messages 245 Enable static IP assignment 200 Enclosure Info tab 89 environmental alarms not reported 263 state 95 error codes 268 administrat
247. om Configuration Options window Select the Partitions tab Select a logical drive or logical volume you want to partition Specify the Partition Size in Mbyte and click Create To create multiple partitions of the same size click Add Partition as many times as partitions you want to create You can also type the partition size in the Part Size field and multiply it by the number of partitions you want to create for example 100 128 Any remaining Mbyte is added to the last partition As you add partitions the remaining capacity displayed in Available Size MB decreases by the amount of the partition size To change the size of a partition you have already created select the logical drive or logical volume and click Modify Size 160 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 14 Specify the new size in Mbyte in the Partition Size field and click OK Manage Existing LDOs L s and Partitions Server 206 235 238 592 B52 Controller SUN StorEdge 3510 SN I3411235 6539 MB Partition Size Ge MIE 6539 MB Enter parition size a number to BS39 MB Create multiple partitions of the same 529 MB size Example 1000 32 6539 MB 6539 MB 16639 MB acc 15 Click OK in the Confirm Configuration Operation window to complete the operation and click Close After a logical drive or logical volume has been partitioned when you open a logical drive or logical volume on the main w
248. om New Logical Drives on page 150 196 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 3 Enable or disable over temperature controller shutdown If you want the controller to shut down immediately if the temperature exceeds the threshold limit select Enable in the Temperature Exceeds Threshold field otherwise select Disable When the controller shuts down the controller icon in the main window displays a yellow degraded device status symbol 4 If you want the controller to shut down after the temperature exceeds the threshold limit but not before a specified interval select a time from the Temperature Exceeds Threshold Period field 0 sec 2 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min Default To View Environmental Status for the Controller From the Change Controller Parameters window select the Peripheral tab Click the right scroll bar and scroll down until the Peripheral Device Status box is displayed Change Controller Parameters Server 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8009328 Controller Information Firmware Yersion aap Boot Record Version 1 31H Serial Number 8009328 CPU Type PPC 50 Controller Name 15 Chars Max O Cache Size 1024MB ECC SDRAM Controller Unique ID Hex format O Not Defined 003CE3 Append File ID 331D3 3510 S406F _ Controller Reset Mute Beeper Channel RS 232 Cache i Disk Array i Drive I
249. on 60 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 v To Add or Change Map a Host LUN 1 Choose Configuration Custom Configure 2 Select Change Host LUN Assignments The Change Host LUN Assignments window is displayed Change Host LUN Assignments Server 206 235 238 52 B52 Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8005727 Select Host Channel and SCSI ID Phy Ch OFC PID 40 Used LUNs LUNG Partitions Host LUN Assignments LDL Partition Size Assignment 5 5 LDILY Partition Phy Chl SCSI Ej LUN G Q 8 Q 310284 Primary LDG 1 310284MB Primary UDG lt lt Unmap Host LUN lt lt Partition Assignment 6 40 0 Cancel Help 3 From the Select Host Channel and SCSI ID list box select the channel and ID to which the LUN is to be assigned All available logical drives are displayed under Partitions For your reference Used LUNs displays a list of LUNs used for a specified channel and Partition Assignment displays a list of channels IDs and LUNs to which a partition has been assigned 4 Select the partition you want to map and click Assign Host LUN To map multiple partitions up to 32 select the first partition scroll to the last partition and Shift click to select everything in between Then click Assign Host LUN As a result Unmap Host LUN becomes active 5 When finished click OK to save your chang
250. on allows different devices in the loop to be configured in a token ring style With a Fibre hub a Fibre loop can be rearranged in a star like configuration because the hub itself contains port bypass circuitry that forms an internal loop Bypass circuits can automatically reconfigure the loop once a device is removed or added without disrupting the physical connection to other devices field replaceable unit Gigabyte 1024 Mbyte or 1 073 741 824 bytes Gigabit Interface Converter A hot swappable input output device that plugs into a Gigabit Ethernet port or Fibre Channel A spare drive that is available to all logical drives in an array Spare drives can be part of automatic logical drive rebuild A group is a data object that enables multiple servers to be contained under a single category Groups are similar in concept to domains and enable you to organize servers Host bus adapter A drive in a RAID 1 or RAID 5 configuration that contains no data and acts as a standby in case another drive fails The ability of a field replaceable unit FRU to be removed and replaced while the RAID array remains powered on and operational Identifier number The process of writing a specific pattern to all data blocks on all drives in a logical drive This process overwrites and destroys existing data on the disks and the logical drive Initialization is required to make the entire logical drive consistent at the onset Initialization ensure
251. on window m Max Drive Size MB displays the maximum drive size per selected physical disk total capacity of each disk A smaller logical drive can be created by decreasing this value The remainder can be used later by expanding the drive as explained in To Expand the Capacity of a Logical Drive or Logical Volume on page 164 m Available Size MB displays the total capacity of all disks which is the total logical drive or logical volume size Note The maximum usable capacity for a logical drive is equal to the smallest physical disk size For example if you add an 18 Gbyte disk and then add a 70 Gbyte disk to be part of the logical drive the maximum usable capacity is 18 Gbyte per drive Note Disk capacity is displayed in powers of 1024 See Device Capacities on page 79 for specific capacity definitions 8 Determine whether the logical drive is to be part of a logical volume Note Logical volumes are unsuited to some modern configurations such as Sun Cluster environments and do not work in those configurations Use logical drives instead For more information see Logical Volumes on page 38 Note Logical drives that have more than one partition cannot be added to a logical volume 9 Determine whether you want to partition the logical volume 48 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Note Partitioning can be done during the initial co
252. onfiguration option Do you want to continue This operation overwrites the present configuration Any existing LDs LVs are deleted and all data is lost If you want to keep your present configuration use the Add LDs LVs to the Current Configuration option Do you want to continue This operation will result in the loss of data on ALL of the modified partitions Do you want to continue To find out the java version currently installed type java version Trap information has been modified Do you want to save it 302 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 TABLE G 34 Installation and Program Prompts Continued Installation and Program Prompts You selected Event as the Trap Type therefore you must select at lease one Active trap event You selected My SMTP server needs authorization therefore you must enter a Password You selected My SMTP server needs authorization therefore you must enter a Username You selected use encrypt therefore you must enter an encrypt key Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 303 304 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 Glossary The glossary lists acronyms and defines RAID terms found throughout the documentation It also includes definitions of the operational states for disk drives and logical drives active active controllers ANSI ARP automatic rebuild
253. onitor an array Topics covered in this chapter include a Starting Sun StorEdge Configuration Service on page 6 a To Start Sun StorEdge Configuration Service on a UNIX Host on page 6 a To Start Sun StorEdge Configuration Service on a Microsoft Windows Host on page 7 a The Main Window on page 7 m Setup Procedures on page 11 a To Add Servers on page 12 a To Delete Servers on page 18 a To Log In and Out on page 19 a To Assign a Server to Manage a Controller on page 21 a To Unassign the Managing Server on page 24 a To Configure Agent Parameters on page 24 a To Verify Storage Configurations on page 27 a To Save the Logical Drive Configuration on page 29 a To Create Solaris Host Partitions on page 31 a To Create Windows 2000 and Windows 2003 Host Partitions on page 32 a To Create IBM AIX Host Logical Volumes on page 33 a To Create HP UX Host Logical Volumes on page 34 m What to Do Next on page 35 Starting Sun StorEdge Configuration service This section explains how to start Sun StorEdge Configuration Service Note You must be superuser administrator to run the console Because the console does not receive event alerts unless it is running after configuring the array always leave Sun StorEdge Configuration Service running in its minimized mode on the console workstation Or instead of keeping the console running you can u
254. orEdge Configuration Service can monitor and manage up to 32 arrays at one time However console response time can decrease as the number of arrays increases 75 The Main Window The main window provides status at a glance for all array devices It indicates the status of the devices and logical drives connected to servers monitored by the console The devices include array controllers disk storage enclosures physical disk drives and other SCSI devices This window s tree structure offers detail for all devices connected to each server The amp or container symbol at the left side of the tree indicates whether the display of devices is expanded or collapsed The container symbol means that you can click to display more devices The container symbol indicates that all devices at and below that level are shown The following figure shows an example of the expanded view of the main window See To Verify Storage Configurations on page 27 for a description of typical device icons displayed for a configured array Sun StorEdge TM Configuration Service File View Configuration Array Administration Help Main View Filter view 206 255 236 52 B52 D FEl Ch 0 Id 0 SUN StorEdge 3310 A A Array SHF 123456 D ca Secondary SUH StorEdge 3310 SN 555555 S Logical Drive 1 736122C 1 RAID 5 6666 MB Vai Logical Drive 1 Partition 0 2222 MB Map 1 1 0 Logical Drive 1 Partition 1 2222 MB Map 1 1 1 Logical Dr
255. orrect If the server and the controller displayed at the top of the window are not correct click Cancel to exit the configuration window and return to the main window Select the appropriate device and select the window again Chapter 4 Full Configuration 41 6 Indicate whether you want to use one of the drives as a standby drive When you select Use a standby drive the program deactivates the RAID levels that do not use standby drives For example RAID 0 has no fault tolerance therefore a standby drive provides no benefit 7 From the RAID levels made available select the appropriate RAID level for the logical drive you are configuring For definitions of the RAID levels see RAID Basics on page 209 You need a minimum of three drives to use RAID 3 or 5 If you select RAID 1 every logical drive requires at least two physical drives If you select four or more drives a logical drive with a RAID 1 0 is created 8 Solaris OS only If you want the new logical drive to be automatically labeled which enables the OS to use the drive click Write a new label to the new LD 9 To use the logical drive immediately select On line Initialization Because logical drive initialization can take up to several hours you can choose to initialize a logical drive on line On line initialization enables you to begin configuring and using the logical drive before initialization is complete However because the controller is buildi
256. ou want to set up the mail server Enter a Contact Name Enter a Customer Name Enter a Location Enter a mail address 300 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 TABLE G 34 Installation and Program Prompts Continued Installation and Program Prompts Enter a System ID Enter a valid gateway address Enter a valid IP address Enter a valid network mask Enter SMTP server information Enter SMTP Server information Enter the login password Enter the ssconfig user password to login Install JRE 1 2 2 1 3 or 1 4 before installing the console Issue Reset to the controller Mapped LUNs exist These must be deleted before creating new LDs LVs If you proceed this operation overwrites the present configuration Any existing LDs LVs are deleted and all data is lost If you want to keep your present configuration use the Add LDs LVs to the Current Configuration option Do you want to continue Please select a LD LV Please select CH ID Please select the Channel ID of which you want to scan Please specify at least one SSCS agent in command line or in ssdegrcli cfg Remove the package PKG_NAME and then try to install this package Select a LD LYV Select a Product ID before downloading firmware Select Boot Record File Select Configuration File Select either AM or PM Select Firmware File Select only ONE LD LYV Select only one row to edit it Select only
257. oup You can view print or purchase a broad selection of Sun documentation at http www sun com documentation Contacting Sun Technical Support For late breaking news and troubleshooting tips review the release notes for your array available at the locations shown in Accessing Sun Documentation on page xxiii If you have technical questions about this product that are not answered in the documentation go to http www sun com service contacting To initiate or check on a USA only service request contact Sun support at 800 USA4SUN To obtain international technical support contact the sales office of each country at http www sun com service contacting sales html Preface xxiii 508 Accessibility Features The Sun StorEdge documentation is available in 508 compliant HTML files that can be used with assistive technology programs for visually impaired personnel These files are provided on the Documentation CD for your product as well as on the websites identified in the Section Accessing Sun Documentation on page xxiii Additionally the software and firmware applications provide keyboard navigation and shortcuts which are documented in the user s guides Sun Welcomes Your Comments Sun is interested in improving its documentation and welcomes your comments and suggestions You can submit your comments by going to http www sun com hwdocs feedback Please include the title and part number
258. oup displays the servers that make up the group that is selected in the main window To access View Group double click the group icon gsy in the main window or select the group icon and choose View View Group The Server List displays all servers that are attached to the specified group Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 83 i Buy E fou H Group Mame Sstelak Group Information Status Qnline Serer List status IP Address Motdiscovered 206 2395 236 70 Motdiscovered 206 235 236 645 Online 206 235 238 563 To view more information about any of the servers listed select the appropriate status record in the list and click View or double click the status record A window describing the corresponding server is displayed View Server View Server displays the characteristics of the server that is selected in the main window To access View Server double click the server icon in the main window or select the server icon and choose View View Server 84 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Serer 206 6 181 212 techtest Serer Information Status Good Operating System Suns 5 9 Agent Version 2 0 Release Build 0 IP Address 206 6 181 212 Socket Port 1270 Connection List Status Driver Good pci f 4000 ntraserer Ultra1 60 sc sige Good pCa FAO pci lsc sigs en erove Part of the TCP IP network the socket port makes a connection between the server and
259. pCa TAO pci sc sigs Reser prove ee 9 If the program has not been configured to manage the array you need to assign the server to manage the controller Choose Array Administration Controller Assignment Select a server from the Server to manage this controller list and click Apply An out of band HBA is displayed in the main window and View HBA Card is displayed in the Menu Bar under the View menu Note If an out of band HBA is not displayed in the window reset the controller Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 121 sun storEdge Th Configuration Service File View Configuration Array Administration Help fee Out of Band EPF ch 0 Id 0 SUN StorEdge 3310 A A Array SN Ox15 E Secondary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 3326420 u Aray Ch 0 Id 14 SUN StorEdge 2310 A amp EF Primary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 3326436 v To Remove an Array From Out of Band Management 1 Select the server 2 Choose View Agent Options Management 3 Select the array s IP address that you want to remove click Remove and click OK The HBA remains displayed in the main window to remove it you need to unassign and reassign the managing server 4 From the main window choose Array Administration Controller Assignment 5 Select the controller for which you want to unassign a server 6 From the Server to manage this controller list box select none and click Apply 7 Click Close to confirm 8 Reassign the managi
260. page 140 1 Select the controller with the configuration you want to save Chapter 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 29 2 Choose Configuration Save Configuration The Save Configuration window is displayed Save Configuration Look in C cfgsavset El ft El CC storedge cty File name istoredge cf Save Files of type configuration file cfg Cancel 3 Navigate to the required drive and folder to locate the configuration file s to be updated indicated by a cfg extension Save the file s to a diskette or a drive external to the array That is maintain copies of these configuration files off site 4 Specify the configuration file name and click Save The Save Configuration window is displayed Save Configuration Serer 206 295 236 685 SUNblade Card Primary SUN StorEdge 3310 A A Array SM OO0032 Directory fopleauUnyescsfsscsconsolefctysay set File storedge cty Enter Description forthe Saveset here ox _carea ee 5 Type a description of the configuration you are saving and click OK The controller configuration information is saved to a cfg file 30 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Creating Host Partitions When you are satisfied with your storage configuration you can partition the new device through the OS To Create Solaris Host Partitions The following steps are general guidelines For d
261. pgrade Firmware on SAF TE SES Devices Note SAF TE devices are used by SCSI arrays and SES devices are used by Fibre Channel arrays Select the array Choose Array Administration Download FW for Devices Click the Download FW for SAF TE SES Devices tab m To add a device select it from Available SAF TE Devices and click Add Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 177 m To remove a device select it from Selected SAF TE Devices and click Remove Download Firmware for Disk or SAFTE SES Devices File Name Browse ProductID Download Fiy for Disks Download FW for SAFTE SES Devices Available SAF TE Devices Card ChiID Vendor ProductID Revision StorEdge 3510 SN 3341333 2 28 SUN StorEdge 3510F A oo00 Selected SAF TE Devices Card ChID vendor ProductID Revision 4 Click Browse and locate the download firmware file 5 Select the download firmware file click Open and click OK The firmware starts to download and two progress windows are displayed 6 When the progress reaches 100 click OK 7 To verify that the firmware has downloaded successfully select View gt View Enclosure and make sure the firmware version has changed in the Firmware Rev field 8 So that the console displays properly you need to probe for new inventory Select the server icon and choose View View Server to send a command to the selected server to probe for new
262. plication you must enter it For information on creating or changing the password refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for your array Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 _ Web Server Configuration Information gt Verity the IP address ofthe managing agent 206 241 235 42 Verity the IP address ofthe StorEdge device 206 243 255 52 Enter the root password of the StorEdge device po Reenter the root password ofthe StorEdge device pO Cancel After the files are transferred successfully a confirmation message is displayed and the console can now be accessed through the web v To Access the Console From the Web Browser 1 Open the web browser 2 Type the following URL address http tp address of controller esm htm1 3 Continue monitoring maintaining and updating storage as explained in the applicable chapters in this guide Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 125 126 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 CHAPTER Maintaining the Array This chapter explains how to maintain the integrity of the array using Array Administration Topics covered in this chapter are as follows a Array Administration Activities on page 128 To Check Parity on page 128 To Schedule a Parity Check on page 130 To Scan Physical Disks for Bad Blocks Media Scan on page 132
263. ponent and Alarm Characteristics on page 225 To Download Firmware for Devices on page 227 To Discover a Drive on page 227 Note Most Sun StorEdge 3000 family products offer a standalone JBOD The Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array is a standalone JBOD Only the procedures contained in this appendix apply to the Sun StorEdge 3120 SCSI array To Enable JBOD Support To monitor peripheral device condition and events of a JBOD you first need to enable JBOD support Choose View Agent Options Management If you are not already logged in as ssconfig or ssadmin a password prompt is displayed type the password The Agent Options Management window is displayed Select the Enable JBOD Support check box To immediately display the JBOD in the main window you need to probe for new inventory Choose View View Server and click Probe 223 4 Click OK The JBOD is displayed in the main window In a single bus configuration both ports of the JBOD are connected to one HBA on the server as shown in the following example Sun StorEdge TM Configuration Service Console File View Configuration Array Administration Help Ch 0 Id 8 SEAGATE ST3 73307LSUN726 70007 ME Ch 0 Id 9 SEAGATE ST373307LSUN726 70007 ME Ch 0 Id 10 SEAGATE ST373307LSUN726 70007 ME Ch 0 ld 11 SEAGATE ST373307LSUN726 70007 ME Ch 0 Id 5 SUN StorEdge 3120 D In a split bus configuration each port is connected to its own H
264. pper right corner of the window The Controller Array Progress window is displayed that shows the completion percentage of the rebuild If there are array activities such as initialization rebuild or parity check occurring on multiple controllers the Select Controller Progress window is displayed first 7 Select the controller whose progress you want to view and click OK The Controller Array Progress window is displayed and shows the array rebuilding status for that controller Chapter 7 Maintaining the Array 139 v To Restore a Logical Drive Configuration This section describes how to restore the array configuration information from a backup file You must have saved a backup file using the Save command as explained in Configuration File on page 62 If the array controller and its drives are damaged you can restore the array configuration to a new controller without having to completely reconfigure the storage array Caution Restore the array configuration from a file only if the configuration file is current Data loss will result from restoring an outdated or incorrect configuration If you are sure that the backup file contains the correct array configuration information continue with the following procedure to restore the configuration 1 Select the controller for the appropriate array 2 Choose Configuration Load Configuration The Select Configuration File window is displayed Select Configuration F
265. ptimization Actual logical drive maximum capacities are usually determined by practical considerations or the amount of disk space available Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 187 Caution In FC and SATA configurations with large drive capacities the size of the logical drive might exceed the device capacity limitation of your operating system Be sure to check the device capacity limitation of your operating system before creating the logical drive If the logical drive size exceeds the capacity limitation you must partition the logical drive Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for details regarding maximum usable capacity of a logical drive depending on RAID level and optimization mode 4 Set Periodic Cache Flush Time Setting a Periodic Cache Flush Time enables the controller to flush cache to logical drive storage at specified intervals This safety measure prevents the accumulation of data in cache that could be lost in the event of power loss Select one of the following values m Disabled Terminates periodic cache flush enabling the controller to flush cache when data in cache is written to disk m Continuous Sync Continuously flushes data from cache to logical drive storage m 30 sec Flushes cache to logical drive storage after each 30 second interval m 1 min Flushes cache to logical drive storage after each one minute interval m 2 min Flushes cache to logical driv
266. put displayed includes HBA port and node WWNs remind O Window Edit Options Help bash 2 05 luxadm e port Found path to 2 HBA ports fdevices pci if 4000 SUNW q 1c 2 fp 0 6 devctl CONNECTED fdevices pcia 1f 4000 SUNW q lc 2 1 fp o 0 devct CONNECTED bash 2 05 bash 2 05 luxadm e dump_map devices pci 1f 4000 SUNW g lc 2 1 fp o o devctl Pos AL_PA ID Hard_Addr Port WWN Node WWN Type 0 1 zd 8 210100e808b375715 200100e08b375715 Ox1f CUnknown Type Host Bus Adapter 1 b2 20 b2 216000cOFFO00001 206000coff000001 0x0 Disk device bash 2 05 bash 2 05 luxadm e dump_map devices pci 1f 4000 SUNW q lc 2 fp o o devctl Pos AL_PA ID Hard_Addr Port WWN Node WWN Type o 1 7d 210000e08b175715 200000e08b175715 Ox1f Unknown Type Host Bus Adapter 1 98 30 98 226000cOFFOGG001 206000cOFFO00001 Oxd CSES device bash 2 05 Linux and Microsoft Windows OS The following steps explain how to determine the HBA WWN on a Linux and Microsoft Windows host Boot a specific host and note the BIOS version and HBA card models connected to your host Access the HBA card s BIOS with the appropriate command alt q or control a are commonly used If the host has multiple HBA cards select the card which is connected to the storage Scan the card to look for devices attached to it usually with the Scan Fibre Devices or the Fibre Disk Utility The node name or similar label is the HBA worldwide name Example with a Qlogic card
267. r a physical drive associated with a logical drive fails For a standby drive to take the place of another drive it must be at least equal in size to the failed drive Also the failed drive itself must be from a RAID 1 3 or 5 A local spare drive is a standby drive assigned to serve one specified logical drive When a member drive of this specified logical drive fails the local spare drive becomes a member drive and automatically starts to rebuild A global spare drive does not only serve one specified logical drive When a member drive from any of the logical drives fail the global spare drive joins that logical drive and automatically starts to rebuild Global spares are used in the order in which they are created 5 Determine the RAID level the program automatically computes the maximum size logical drive that can be created at that RAID level 6 Determine whether you want to partition the logical drive Chapter 4 Full Configuration 47 A partition is a division of the logical drive or logical volume Partitions enable you to create the appearance of having separate logical drives or logical volumes for file management multiple users or other purposes Note Partitioning can be done during the initial configuration or after the logical drive has been created Note Logical drives that have more than one partition cannot be added to a logical volume 7 Understand the disk capacities displayed in the New Configurati
268. r icons 8 trap daemon troubleshooting 262 trap messages 246 traps Card Name 246 Community Name box 255 Event Date 246 Event Severity 246 Event Time 246 Internet Protocol IP 246 IP address format 255 Microsoft SNMP Properties window 255 not received from server 262 OID object identifier 246 on HP UX OS 257 on IBM AIX 258 on IBM AIX OS 258 on Linux 256 on Solaris 256 Server Address and Name 246 Service Configuration window 255 SNMP trap messages 246 Transmission Control Protocol TCP 246 Trap Destinations list 255 trap recipient setup 254 Traps tab 255 traps setup 253 tree view 79 troubleshooting 259 identifying physical drives 89 See also error codes See also error messages U unmapping LUNs 62 upgrading firmware 320 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 controller 172 hard drives 176 SAF TE devices 177 SES devices 177 Use a standby drive check box 42 V verifying configuration 27 View Controller Configuration 87 View Enclosure command 95 View Enclosure window 95 96 View FRU 107 View FRU window 107 View HBA Card 86 View menu detailed information 83 View Report command 117 W warning New Configuration 49 white device status item 77 worldwide name determining on HP UX OS 241 determining on IBM AIX OS 242 determining on Linux OS 240 determining on Microsoft Windows OS 240 determining on Solaris OS 239
269. r name of the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP mail server that is delivering the email messages to the destination addresses specified earlier and click OK The Add Server window is displayed showing the Mailing Lists tab 7 Complete the Add Server function 16 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 10 a Optional If you want this server to be part of a group select the Grouping tab The Add Server window is displayed Server name Lancer Properties Mailing Lists Grouping Group no group v NO Group Storage Room 1 OK Cancel Help b Select the Group list box to view the choices available select a group and click OK If you want to add more servers repeat Steps 3 through 7 for each server Move the servers you want this console to control to the Managed Servers list If you want this console to manage all the available servers click Add All located at the top of the dialog box To move individual servers to the managed column select each server individually and click Add located between the two list boxes If during the process of adding servers modifications need to be made see To Edit a Server Entry on page 204 When you are finished adding servers click OK to return to the main window Note If the array is attached to multiple hosts and an agent is installed on each host each host s
270. r the program to continue monitoring after this alarm condition starts you must push the Reset button on the right ear of the array Note Controller events can also cause an audible alarm Pushing the Reset button has no effect on audible alarms caused by a controller event See To Mute the Controller Beeper on page 201 for information about muting the beeper See Environmental State on page 96 for information on power supply fan voltage and temperature sensor locations For the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array or Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array to display battery information click Battery and see Battery Information on page 103 To display the FRU IDs and information for all FRUs in the array click View FRU and see View FRU on page 107 Environmental State The Environmental State section of the View Enclosure window reports the status of chassis components including power supplies fans and temperature For the Sun StorEdge 3510 FC array and the Sun StorEdge 3511 SATA array the status of the array s voltage is also displayed It provides an overall environmental status of the chassis as well as the status of the individual components For environmental status of the controller see To View Environmental Status for the Controller on page 197 The View Enclosure window specifies the SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosure SAF TE firmware revision for SCSI arrays and the SCSI Enclosure Services SES firmw
271. ray activity however performance is degraded 8 Auto Assign Global Spare Drive This feature is disabled by default When you enable it the system automatically assigns a global spare to the minimum drive ID in unused drives This enables the array to rebuild automatically without user intervention when a drive is replaced Host I F Tab 9 From the Change Controller Parameters window select the Host I F tab Change Controller Parameters Serer 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8009328 Controller Information Firmware Version 4 11B BootRecord Version 1 31H Serial Number 8009328 CPU Type PPC750 Controller Name 15 Chars Max TECH FC Cache Size 1024MB ECC SDRAM Controller Unique ID Hex format O Not Defined 004DE2 Append File ID 411B 3510 S415F O Controller Reset C Mute Beeper Channel RS 232 Cache Disk Array Drive I F Host liF Redundancy Peripheral Network Protocol Max Queued IO Count 1024 Default w LUNs Per Host 32 v Fibre Connection Loop Default w In Band External Interface Management Enabled Default v ok Cancel Heip 192 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 10 11 12 13 Set the Max Queued IO Count This function enables you to configure the maximum number of I O operations per logical drive that can be accepted from s
272. rbing the radio frequency signals Uninterruptible Power Supply One or more drives that can be grouped into a unit for data storage A cache writing strategy in which the array controller receives the data to be written to disk stores it in the memory buffer and immediately sends the host operating system a signal that the write operation is complete without waiting until the data is actually written to the disk drive Within a short time the controller when not busy writes the data to the disk drive A cache writing strategy used to control write operations The write policy options are CIFS write back and write through cache A cache writing strategy in which the array controller writes the data to the disk drive before signaling the host operating system that the process is complete Write through cache has lower write operation and throughput performance than write back cache but it is the safer strategy with minimum risk of data loss on power failure worldwide name A globally unique hard coded and embedded number assigned by the manufacturer and registered under IEEE that is used to identify hardware Glossary 311 312 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Index A Add Server Grouping tab 17 Add Server Properties parameters 13 Add Server window 13 adding host LUN 61 logical drive 150 new devices probe 85 SCSI drives to logical drive 167 servers 12 agent Agent Op
273. rd the old tape Restart the operation with a different tape The Selected Device list is empty The server already exists The Server Name cannot be empty or only contain any extra spaces The server you selected might have already been shut down The set configuration failed because there is another conflicting operation The set configuration Failed The WWN must be a Hex string that is less than 16 characters There are no available disks to configure There are no LDs LVs to manage There are not enough available disks to add a new LD LV or there are no available LDs to create a LV LDs must be unmapped and partitions must be deleted prior to being used in LVs There is a map to more than one Host therefore the Map to Multiple Hosts property cannot be unchecked Remove the map to multiple hosts before changing this setting There is a problem with the autoloader mechanism Loader mechanism has detected a hardware fault There is no spare or replacement drive Rebuild cannot continue This may cause data loss This operation can take up to one minute This operation might take several seconds Please wait This operation will add to the existing configuration This operation will erase any existing configuration and data Unable to allocate memory for array inquiry Unable to monitor this array Unable to determine local host terminating Unable to eject cartridge because the tape drive is in use Wait until
274. reating partitions 32 determining worldwide name 240 event log location 110 starting Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 7 Win32 using cluster configuration SCSI only 233 Minor field 269 monitoring process 81 mountall command 32 muting alarm 201 beeper 201 N navigating 10 network DHCP 201 RAAP 201 static IP 201 Network tab 198 newfs command 32 Index 317 NTFS 235 O Object Data Manager updating on IBM AIX OS 206 online help 79 optimization maximum capacity per logical drive random 187 sequential 187 random I O stripe size 42 53 152 187 out of band storage management 117 Out of Band Agent preferred over In Band check box 119 P parameters controller 179 parity check 128 scheduling 130 stopping 130 partition creating 160 deleting 162 partitioning 61 162 an existing logical drive 160 requirements 49 passwords 19 performance statistics 145 peripheral devices checking environmental status chassis 95 controller 195 physical devices Physical Drives tab 88 View Physical Device window 94 View Physical Drive 94 Physical Drive Standby State window 203 physical drives displaying in the main window 10 identifying 89 scanning for bad blocks 133 polling status change of devices 25 power supply physical location 98 status 96 probe 85 Product ID list box 176 prompts 300 purple device status icon device status state 77 R RAID Enclosure Info tab
275. requires a cable that is no longer than 25 meters 82 ft The 10 100BASE T Ethernet port that is used to configure a RAID array Megabyte 1024 Kbyte or 1 048 576 bytes A background process that continuously checks physical drives for bad blocks or other media errors Data written to one disk drive is simultaneously written to another disk drive If one disk fails the other disk can be used to run the array and reconstruct the failed disk The primary advantage of disk mirroring is 100 percent data redundancy Since the disk is mirrored it does not matter if one of the disks fails Both disks contain the same data at all times and either can act as the operational disk Disk mirroring provides 100 percent redundancy but is expensive because each drive in the array is duplicated A RAID technique RAID 5 that offers redundancy with the parity information distributed across all disks in the logical drive Data and its parity are never stored on the same disk In the event that a disk fails the original data can be reconstructed using the parity information and the information on the remaining disks Network Data Management Protocol non volatile random access memory A memory unit equipped with a battery so that the data stays intact even after main power is switched off A Fibre Channel port in a point to point or Fabric connection OpenBoot PROM OBP When you first start Solaris it shows an OK prompt which is the OBP It
276. rompt is displayed type the ssconfig password The Controller Maintenance Options window is displayed 4 Click Mute Controller Beeper or 1 Select the desired controller icon in the main window 2 Choose Configuration Custom Configure 3 Select Change Controller Parameters 4 Select Mute Beeper 144 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Note If the alarm is caused by a failed component muting the beeper has no effect You need to push the Reset button on the right ear of the array See View Enclosure on page 95 for more information about component failure alarms To Bring a Failed Controller Back Online If a controller fails bring it back online in one of two ways Select the controller icon in the main window Choose Array Administration Controller Maintenance If you are not already logged in as ssconfig a password prompt is displayed type the ssconfig password The Controller Maintenance Options window is displayed Click Deassert Failed Redundant Controller or Select the controller icon in the main window Choose Configuration Custom Configure Select Change Controller Parameters Select the Redundancy tab From the Set Controller Config field select Redundant Deassert Reset To Display Performance Statistics Using Performance Statistics you can determine the data transfer rate that is the speed the array is running
277. rough Server List Setup 1 Start Sun StorEdge Configuration Service if it is not already running 2 Choose File Server List Setup The Server List Setup window is displayed Available Serers chlanaged Sewers 206 656 181 121 Tech Remove All lt lt 3 Optional Organize the servers into groups Depending on how many servers you have and where they are located it might be helpful to organize them into groups For example if you have multiple servers in separate storage rooms you might want to create groups based on location a Click Groups in the Server List Setup window The Group List Setup window is displayed Type a name in the Group Name field and click Add Group List Setup Available Groups Group Name storage Room 1 Add en ee 12 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 b To delete a group select the group name from the Available Groups list and click Delete c When you are finished adding and deleting groups click OK The Server List Setup window is displayed 4 Add a server a Click Add under the Available Servers list The Add Server window is displayed l Add Server Sener name Properties Mailing Lists Grouping Network Information IF Address Socket Pon Mot assigned Get IP Addr by Mame Monitoring Login ssmon Password Auto discovery Yes Mo b Type the name of th
278. ry and which one is secondary This prevents any possible conflicts between controllers 3 When an array with redundant controllers is operating with write back cache enabled you can disable the synchronization of cache between the two controllers by selecting Not Synchronized from the Write Through Cache Synchronization list box Caution Disabling cache synchronization and eliminating the mirroring and transferring of data between controllers can improve array performance but it also eliminates the safeguard provided by cache synchronization if one of the controllers fails 4 For changes to take effect reset the controller 5 Click OK to return to the main menu Peripheral Tab The Peripheral tab enables you to configure the array to dynamically switch write policy from write back cache to write through cache when a specified event occurs or threshold is exceeded Once the problem is corrected the original write policy is restored You can also configure the controller to shut down if it exceeds the temperature threshold The Peripheral Device Status box enables you to view the status of all environmental sensors for the controller For environmental status of the chassis see View Enclosure on page 95 Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 195 1 From the Change Controller Parameters window select the Peripheral tab Change Controller Parameters Sewer 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Primary SUM StorEdge 3510
279. s colors 81 Group Name 12 status 80 symbol colors 80 View Group command 83 View Group window 84 H hard drives displaying in the main window 10 HBA dual port main window 85 HBA device adding manually 69 Host I F tab 192 host ID changing in a Fibre configuration 183 Host LUN adding 61 deleting 62 Host LUN Assignments box 62 HP OpenView 245 246 caution 253 troubleshooting 262 HP UX OS creating logical volumes on servers 33 34 determining WWN 241 event log location 110 SNMP traps 257 l IBM AIX OS determining WWN 242 SNMP traps 258 updating the Object Data Manager 206 writing event to log file 111 IBM NetView 253 icons critical 77 degraded 77 determining device status 77 main window 28 server with satellite dish attached 27 toolbar Custom Configuration 9 Event Log 9 Save Event Log 9 Save Report 9 Server List Setup 9 Standard Configuration 9 installing Sun StorEdge Configuration Service on Solaris OS before you begin procedures 3 IP address changed in DHCP environment 261 for traps 255 IP addresses cluster configuration 237 J JBOD discovering a drive HP UX OS 229 IBM AIX OS 229 Microsoft Windows OS 228 Solaris OS 227 228 monitoring 223 233 single bus configuration 224 316 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 upgrading firmware on hard drives 227 L label automatically writing 56 Linux OS event log
280. s 234 v To Set Up Cluster Configuration 234 Determining Host Worldwide Names Fibre Channel and SATA Only 239 v To Determine the HBA WWN 239 Solaris OS 239 Linux and Microsoft Windows OS 240 HP UX OS 241 IBM AIX OS 242 v To Determine the FC Array WWNN 243 v To Determine the FC Array WWPN 244 Email and SNMP 245 How SNMP Works 246 SNMP Trap Messages 246 Agents and Managers 247 Management Information Base MIB 247 SNMP Objects 247 SNMP Request Types 248 SNMP Security 248 Using Sun StorEdge Configuration Service to Send SNMP Traps 250 v To Send Email Messages for Each Server 250 v Setting Up Servers to Send Traps 253 Microsoft Windows Servers 253 Contents xi To Check the Community String for a Microsoft Windows Host 253 To Specify the Trap Recipient for a Microsoft Windows Host 254 To Set Up a Solaris Host 256 To Set Up a Linux Host 256 To Set Up an HP UX Host 257 v To Set Up an IBM AIX Host 258 a a a Sending SNMP Traps Without Using Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 258 F Troubleshooting 259 G Error Codes and Messages 267 Error Codes 268 Error and Status Messages 286 Installation and Program Prompts 300 Glossary 305 Index 313 xii Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLE 3 1 TABLE 3 2 TABLE 4 1 TABLE 4 2 TABLE 4 3 TABLE 6 1 TABLE 6 2 TABLE 6 3 TABLE 6 4 TABLE 6 5 TABLE 6 6 TABLE 6 7 TABLE 6 8 TABLE 8 1 TABLE 8 2
281. s are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the U S and in other countries Netscape is a trademark or registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries U S Government Rights Commercial use Government users are subject to the Sun Microsystems Inc standard license agreement and applicable provisions of the FAR and its supplements DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID Copyright 2002 2007 Dot Hill Systems Corporation et d autres 2200 Faraday Avenue Suite 100 Carlsbad Californie 92008 Etats Unis Tous droits r serv s Sun Microsystems Inc et Dot Hill Systems Corporation peuvent avoir les droits de propri t intellectuels relatants a la technologie incorpor e dans le produit qui est d crit dans ce document En particulier et sans la limitation ces droits de propri t intellectuels peuvent inclure un ou plus des brevets am ricains num r s a http www sun com patents et un ou les brevets plus suppl mentaires ou les applications de brevet en attente dans les Etats Unis et dans les autres pays Ce produit ou document est prot g par un copyright et distribu avec des licences qui
282. s displayed when you choose View Array Admin Progress 136 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Reestablish automatic rebuild capability by replacing the failed drive using instructions contained in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array Wait at least 60 seconds after removing the failed drive before inserting a new drive Make sure the replacement drive is at least equal to the largest drive in the enclosure Install the replacement drive in the same slot drive bay as the failed drive the replacement drive then becomes the new standby drive After the rebuild process is complete and the logical drive is online again back up the array controller configuration to a file on an external drive or diskette See To Save the Logical Drive Configuration on page 29 To Rebuild a Device Without a Standby Drive If there is no standby drive in the array you need to replace the failed drive before the automatic rebuild process can start To recover from a drive failure when there is no standby drive replace the failed drive by using the instructions contained in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Installation Operation and Service Manual for your array Wait at least 60 seconds after removing the failed drive before inserting a new drive Make sure the capacity of the replacement drive is at least equal to that of the failed drive
283. s hosts in the network to determine if an array is online v To Mute the Controller Beeper When an event occurs that causes the controller to beep for example when a logical drive fails during a rebuild or when adding a physical drive you can mute the beeper in one of two ways 1 Select the desired controller icon in the main window 2 Choose Array Administration Controller Maintenance 3 If you are not already logged in as ssconfig a password prompt is displayed type the ssconfig password The Controller Maintenance Options window is displayed 4 Click Mute Controller Beeper or 1 Select the desired controller icon in the main window 2 Choose Configuration Custom Configure Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 201 3 Select Change Controller Parameters 4 Select Mute Beeper Note If the alarm is caused by a failed component muting the beeper has no effect You need to push the Reset button on the right ear of the array See View Enclosure on page 95 for more information about component failure alarms v To Assign or Change Standby Drives A standby drive acts as a spare to support automatic data rebuilding after a physical drive in a fault tolerant non RAID 0 logical drive fails For a standby drive to take the place of another drive it must be at least equal in size to the failed drive and all of the logical drives dependent on the failed disk must be redundant RAID 1 3 5 or 1 0
284. s itself as soon as reinitialization of the controller is complete Chapter 7 Maintaining the Array 143 v To Shut Down the Controller Whenever the array is powered off you need to first shut down the controller to ensure that write cache is flushed to disk so that the backup battery if present is not drained by the cache memory Caution Shutting down the controller causes the array to stop responding to I O requests from the host This might result in data loss unless all I O activity is suspended by halting all applications that are accessing the array and unmounting any file systems that are mounted from the array In redundant controller configurations shutting down the controller affects all LUNs on both controllers 1 Select any storage icon in the main window 2 Choose Array Administration Controller Maintenance 3 If you are not already logged in as ssconfig a password prompt is displayed type the ssconfig password The Controller Maintenance Options window is displayed 4 Click Shut Down the Controller v To Mute the Controller Beeper When an event occurs that causes the controller to beep for example when a logical drive fails during a rebuild or when adding a physical drive you can mute the controller beeper in one of two ways 1 Select the controller icon in the main window 2 Choose Array Administration Controller Maintenance 3 If you are not already logged in as ssconfig a password p
285. s program exiting Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 299 Installation and Program Prompts TABLE G 34 contains a list of installation and program prompts TABLE G 34 Installation and Program Prompts Installation and Program Prompts An existing configuration for this package is found Do you want to restore it Are you sure you want to continue Are you sure you want to delete the log file Are you sure you want to delete the trap Are you sure you want to overwrite the file Are you sure you want to rebuild the drive Before starting to use SUNWsscsConsole run opt SUNWsscs sscsconsole config_sscon to input the pathname of the default Web browser to access HTML help files Begin downloading firmware to devices Do you want to continue Cannot find the Java Runtime Environment SJRE_MAJOR SJRE_MINOR or above SUNWsscs Console needs JRE 1 2 or above to run The Console will try to find it in usr java usr jre usr local java or usr local jre If you installed the JRE in a directory other than one mentioned above make a link Changes made to this setting will NOT take effect until the controller is RESET Prior to resetting the controller the operation may not proceed normally Do you want to RESET controller Click View to select one file Do you want to download firmware to the controller Do you want to download firmware with boot record to the controller Do you want to save the current event log file Do y
286. s that any parity checks performed in the future are executed correctly Just a Bunch of Disks A storage device that consist of drives with no controllers Local area network Logical drive A section of disk storage space that is presented to the host operating system as a single physical drive A logical drive might be located on one or more physical drives Glossary 307 LUN LUN mapping LUN masking LVD management port Mbyte media scan mirroring RAID 1 multiple block striping 308 with distributed parity NDMP NVRAM N port OBP Logical Unit Number The major and minor device numbers make up the logical unit numbering sequence for a particular device connected to a computer The ability to change the virtual LUN as presented to the server from storage This enables such benefits as the ability of a server to boot from the SAN without requiring of a local disk drive Each server requires LUN 0 to boot The characteristic that enables an administrator to dynamically map an HBA to a specified LUN This provides an individual server or multiple servers access to an individual drive or to multiple drives and prohibits unwanted server access to the same drives Low Voltage Differential A low noise low power and low amplitude signaling technology that enables data communication between a supported server and storage devices LVD signaling uses two wires to drive one signal over copper wire and
287. s window is the default global cache setting for all logical drives See Cache Tab on page 185 Chapter 4 Full Configuration 53 54 m Default Write through or Write back Assigns the global write policy that is specified in the Write Back field of the Cache Tab on the Change Controller Parameters window If the global setting for write policy is changed automatically changes the write policy for this logical drive The array can be configured to dynamically switch write policy from write back cache to write through cache if specified events occur Write policy is only automatically switched for logical drives with write policy configured to Default See Peripheral Tab on page 195 for more information about event trigger operations m Write back Assigns write back cache regardless of any changes to the global write policy m Write through Assigns write through cache regardless of any changes to the global write policy 15 This step depends on what you want to do next m To create another logical drive click New LD and repeat Step 1 through Step 14 m To add this logical drive to a logical volume click Add to LV and see To Create and Partition a Logical Volume on page 57 a To partition this logical drive continue with the following steps In this example a small logical drive is created and partitioned m If you are finished creating logical drives and do not want to add this logical drive to a
288. se Sun StorEdge Diagnostic Reporter a companion utility of Sun StorEdge Configuration Service that runs as a background service that sends messages from the hosts and array to specified email addresses For details refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Diagnostic Reporter User s Guide For another method of receiving event alerts see Sending SNMP Traps Without Using Sun StorEdge Configuration Service on page 258 Note You cannot use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and the Sun StorEdge CLI at the same time to configure monitor or maintain an array Note For Sun StorEdge Configuration Service to view and manage an array each HBA card must be connected to the primary controller v To Start Sun StorEdge Configuration Service on a UNIX Host At the command prompt type gssconsole 6 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 v To Start Sun StorEdge Configuration Service on a Microsoft Windows Host For Windows 2000 choose Start Programs Sun StorEdge 3000 Family gt Configuration Service For Windows 2003 choose Start All Programs Sun StorEdge 3000 Family gt Configuration Service The Main Window When the program initializes for the first time the main window is blank The Add Server window is displayed prompting you to add servers to the Managed Servers list of the console you are using For details on adding servers see To Add Servers on page 12
289. sed before running the ioscan command 8 IBM AIX OS only To ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to update the Object Data Manager ODM as explained in Updating the Object Data Manager on an IBM AIX Host on page 206 154 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Media Scan A firmware menu option called Media Scan at Power Up specifies whether media scan runs automatically following a controller power cycle reset or after logical drive initialization This setting is disabled by default For more information refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide To determine whether or not media scan is running see the event log For more information on the event log window see Event Log Window on page 112 For more information about media scan see To Scan Physical Disks for Bad Blocks Media Scan on page 132 To Add a Logical Volume From Existing Logical Drives Note Logical volumes are unsuited to some modern configurations such as Sun Cluster environments and do not work in those configurations Use logical drives instead For more information see Logical Volumes on page 38 Note Before you can add a logical volume from existing logical drives you must unmap the logical drives Select the array that you want to configure Choose Configuration Custom Configure Note T
290. set 03 Host Channel Abort Tag Message 04 Host Channel Parity Error 05 Host Channel Reselect Timeout Error Field Logical Drive Event Note Logical drive event messages often begin with the letters LG an abbreviation for Logical Group that identifies the logical drive number to which the message applies TABLE G 29 Logical Drive Event Errors Error Field Description 01 Logical Drive SCSI Drive Fail 02 Logical Drive Initialization Fail 03 Logical Drive Rebuild Fail 04 Logical Drive Initialization Commenced 05 Logical Drive Initialization Completed 06 Logical Drive Rebuild Commenced 07 Logical Drive Rebuild Completed 08 Logical Drive parity check Failed 09 Logical Drive Expand Failed 0A Logical Drive Add Disk Failed 0B Logical Drive Parity Check Commenced 0C Logical Drive Parity Check Completed OD Logical Drive Expand Commenced OE Logical Drive Expand Completed 282 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 TABLE G 29 Logical Drive Event Errors Continued Error Field Description OF Logical Drive Add Disk Commenced 10 Logical Drive Add Disk Completed 11 Logical Drive Add Disk Paused 12 Logical Drive Add Disk Continued 13 Logical Drive Clone Commenced 14 Logical Drive Clone Completed 15 Logical Drive Clone Failed 16 Logical Drive Media Check Commenced IZ Logical Drive Media Check Completed 18 Logical Drive Media Check Continued 19 Logical Drive Media Check Failed 1A Lo
291. shown in the following example the main window shows the controller device icons only under the server where the monitoring is enabled for this array Sun StorEdge TM Configuration Service Console File View Configuration Aay Administration Help Wain View Filter View Q 206 6 161 212 techtest o EEP Ch 0 Id 0 SUN StorEdge 3310 A A Array SN 000001 Ge FEEEW Ch 0 1 40 SUN StorEdge 3510 A A Array SH O005CES Changing a Server Assignment When you assign a server to manage a controller information regarding the managing server is produced Sun StorEdge Configuration Service stores this information on a controller and uses it to keep track of the managing server In the event a server is shut down for maintenance for example and you try to assign 22 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 another server to manage the controller Sun StorEdge Configuration Service reads the stored server information from the controller and warns you that the controller is being managed already You can view the managing server name by choosing the firmware application menu called view and edit Host luns Edit Host ID WWN Name List Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for your array for information about accessing the firmware application lt Main Menu gt Quick installation view and edit Logical drives view and edit logical Volumes view and edit Hos
292. spare and a global spare drive available the local spare drive is used Global spare drive Global spare drive Logical drive 0 Logical drive 1 Logical drive 2 FIGURE A 12 Global Spare Appendix A RAID Basics 221 Having Both Local and Global Spares In FIGURE A 13 the member drives in logical drive 0 are 9 Gbyte drives and the members in logical drives 1 and 2 are all 4 Gbyte drives Local spare drive Global spare drive 9GB 4GB 4GB Logical drive 0 Logical drive 1 Logical drive 2 FIGURE A 13 Mixing Local and Global Spares A local spare drive always has higher priority than a global spare drive that is if a drive fails and both a local spare and a global spare drive are available the local spare drive is used In FIGURE A 13 it is not possible for the 4 Gbyte global spare drive to join logical drive 0 because of its insufficient capacity The 9 Gbyte local spare drive aids logical drive 0 once a drive in this logical drive fails If the failed drive is in logical drive 1 or 2 the 4 Gbyte global spare drive immediately aids the failed drive 222 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 APPENDIX B Monitoring JBODs This appendix explains how to enable and monitor a standalone JBOD Note that not all of the array functionality is supported for JBODs Procedures covered in this appendix include the following To Enable JBOD Support on page 223 To View Com
293. st Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SM 9009328 Controller Information Firmware version 4110 Boot Record Version 1 31H Serial Number BOO9S28 CPL Type PPCY5o Controller N Seana TECH FC Cache Size 1024MB ECC SDRAM 15 Chars Max Controller Unique ID 0O4DE2 Append File ID 411D 3510 8417F Hex format O Not Defined 004DE2 _ Controller Reset _ Mute Beeper Channel DiskArray Drive liF HostiiF Redundancy Peripheral Protocol Drive Motor Spin Wp Disabled Detault T SAF TEMSES Polling Period si 30 0 Disk Access Latency si 15 Detault i SCSI WO Timecutis 30 0 Tag Count Per drive 32 Default T Drive Check Feriodis 30 0 Auto Assign Global Spare Drive Disabled Detault T 190 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 2 From the Drive Motor Spin Up field select either Disabled or Enabled Drive Motor Spin Up determines how the physical drives in a disk array are started When the power supply is unable to provide sufficient current for all physical drives and controllers that are powered up at the same time spinning up the physical drives serially requires less current If Drive Motor Spin Up is enabled the drives are powered up sequentially and some of these drives might not be ready for the controller to access when the array powers up Increase the disk access delay time so that the controller will wait longer for the drive to be ready 3 Set the Disk Access
294. strapd is running by running the following command ps e grep ss The output includes the name sstrapd if it does not start or stop the agent as explained in the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Software Installation Guide 2 Check that the proper target address of the enterprise management console and the community string is set up on the server properly 3 Make sure that the MIB is compiled under the SNMP management console On a Solaris Linux and HP UX OS the RST_OID MIB file is located in opt SUNWsscs ssagent On an IBM AIX OS this file is located in usr SUNWsscs ssagent On Microsoft Windows this file is located in Program Files Sun ssagent Refer to your SNMP management console documentation such as HP OpenView for information about how to compile the MIB Symptom HP OpenView won t install or the trap daemon won t start If you installed HP OpenView on the same server that you set up to send SNMP traps there are insufficient system resources for both the trap daemon and HP OpenView to run Reconfigure system resources as explained in the following steps 1 Add the following lines to the end of etc system shmsys shminfo_shmmax 0x2000000 shmsys shminfo_shmmin 1 shmsys shminfo_shmmni 256 shmsys shminfo_shmseg 256 semsys seminfo_semmap 256 semsys seminfo_semmni 512 semsys seminfo_semmns 512 semsys seminfo_semms1 32 262 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 Note If
295. t lt item gt lt item gt lt serial_number gt lt serial_number gt lt revision gt lt revision gt lt vendor_jedec_id gt lt vendor_jedec_id gt lt manufacturing_date gt lt manufacturing_date gt lt manufacturing_location gt lt manufacturing_location gt 116 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 View Keport Use the View Report option to review a report that was created 1 Choose File View Report The Open dialog box for selecting the report is displayed Look in sscsconsole al ft El oC ie cJ bin CJ cfgsayset CJ hipfiles CJ lib browser default 4 Console htm console keystore y errlog tet F M etina Co Open Files of type All Files Cancel 2 Select the report you want to review and click Open In Band and Out of Band Storage Management The out of band storage management capability enables you to monitor and manage arrays over the network using TCP IP Unlike in band storage management the standard method of storage management for storage which requires the agent to be running on the server that is physically attached to the storage out of band storage management does not require the agent to be running on the server that is physically attached to the storage With out of band storage management if the server that is attached to the storage is shut down monitoring and maintenance is unaffected The following figur
296. t Map from the Channel list box 12 To use the logical drive immediately while it is building select On line Initialization Because logical drive initialization can take up to several hours you can choose to initialize a logical drive on line On line initialization enables you to begin configuring and using the logical drive before initialization is complete However because the controller is building the logical drive while performing I O operations initializing a logical drive on line requires more time than off line initialization If you do not select On line initialization you can configure and use the drive only after initialization is complete Because the controller is building the logical drive without having to also perform I O operations off line initialization requires less time than on line initialization Note On line Initialization does not apply to logical volumes 52 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 13 14 Select the Stripe Size Select Default to assign the stripe size per Optimization mode as specified in TABLE 4 2 or select a different stripe size TABLE 4 3 Default Stripe Size Per Optimization Mode RAID Level Sequential I O Random I O 0 1 5 128 32 3 16 4 Once the stripe size is selected and data is written to logical drives the only way to change the stripe size of an individual logical drive is to back up all its data to another location d
297. t Port 1270 Monitoring Login ssmon Password iis Auto discovery Yes Mo 3 Make the necessary changes Click OK to register your changes For descriptions of the fields in this window see To Add Servers on page 12 The Add Server and Edit Server windows contain the same fields IP Address Shortcut If the network address has changed click Get IP Addr by Name The program searches for and displays the correct IP address if you typed the name of the server as it is recorded by the name service used by the network If the name used for the server is not the same as the server s network name or if the naming service is not yet updated delete the server and add it again 4 Move the server name back to the Managed Servers list 5 Click OK to exit the Edit Server window Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 205 Updating the Object Data Manager on an IBM AIX Host For an IBM AIX host to ensure that the environment is stable and accurate after making configuration changes you need to update the Object Data Manager ODM v To Update the ODM 1 Run the following command for each deleted disk rmdev 1 hdisk d where is the number of the disk that was removed Caution Never remove hdisk0O To remove multiple disks hdisk1 up to hdisk19 run the following commands usr bin ksh93 for i 1 i lt 20 i do rmdev 1 hdiskS i d done If the rmdev command returns disk busy errors us
298. t can take as long as 15 minutes for the cluster icon in the console to turn from purple to gray and perhaps another 10 minutes before it goes back to purple again If you want to have a load balanced configuration with some of the storage running on the other server you need to use the Cluster Administrator to move one or more disk groups to the other server 238 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 APPENDIX D Determining Host Worldwide Names Fibre Channel and SATA Only This appendix explains how to determine the HBA worldwide name WWN the FC array worldwide node name WWNN and the FC array worldwide port name WWPN Steps include m To Determine the HBA WWN on page 239 m To Determine the FC Array WWNN on page 243 m To Determine the FC Array WWPN on page 244 To Determine the HBA WWN Prior to using the LUN Filter feature it is helpful to identify which Sun StorEdge 3510 Fibre Channel array is connected to which HBA card and the WWN assigned to each card Solaris OS The following steps explain how to determine the HBA WWN on a Solaris host To determine an HBA WWN you must first display devices attached to that host If you have a new HBA device installed on your computer reboot the computer Type the following command luxadm e port All attached devices are displayed 239 3 Type the following command luxadm e dump map The out
299. t luns CHL 1 ID B Primary Controller CHL 1 ID 1 Secondary Controller ID 2 Primary Controller The server name is stored in Host 1D WUN hexadecimal values for the ASCII unnnnnnan323542 sscs ar ___ d character set If you want to change a server assignment for example because you are moving an array to a new location before you move the array you need to unassign the managing server following the steps in To Unassign the Managing Server on page 24 seen cecce oa Em hil If you have already moved the array when the array starts up you might see a warning message that the controller is already being managed by another server Because the force option doesn t unassign the agent of the original server only override the current server assignment after you have unassigned the original managing server If you do not manually unassign the original server it continues to monitor and manage the unit along with the new server After you have unassigned a server you can also manually delete the server following the steps in To Manually Delete a Server Using the Terminal Window on page 24 Chapter 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 23 Vv 1 2 To Unassign the Managing Server From the main window choose Array Administration Controller Assignment Select the array controller for which you want to unassign a server From the Server to manage this contro
300. t setting up a cluster configuration SCSI Only Appendix D explains how to determine the host worldwide name FC and SATA Only Appendix E explains how to set up full event monitoring and email notification capabilities Appendix F provides troubleshooting suggestions for a list of symptoms Appendix G contains a list of Sun StorEdge Configuration Service error codes and messages The Glossary provides RAID terminology and definitions used throughout the product documentation xx Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Using UNIX Commands This document might not contain information on basic UNIX commands and procedures such as shutting down the system booting the system and configuring devices Refer to the following for this information m Software documentation that you received with your system Solaris operating system documentation which is at hetpr decs sun com Shell Prompts Shell C shell C shell superuser Bourne shell and Korn shell Bourne shell and Korn shell superuser Prompt machine name machine name Preface xxi Typographic Conventions Typeface Meaning AaBbCc123 The names of commands files and directories on screen computer output AaBbCc123 What you type when contrasted with on screen computer output AaBbCc123 Book titles new words or terms words to be emphasized Replace command line variables with real
301. t was assigned when Sun StorEdge Configuration Service was installed See To Log In and Out on page 19 for more information on passwords 5 Select or Deselect Automatic Discovery of servers a Select No for Auto Discovery if you need a very secure environment where access even to server inventory data is restricted When you select No the program does not retrieve server information when starting up The server s icon appears color coded white instead of active purple to indicate it is undiscovered When you double click an undiscovered server Sun StorEdge Configuration Service prompts you for the ssmon user password Optionally you can also select the server and select File Login Select Yes for Auto Discovery to retrieve all information available about this server when the console is started If you select Yes for Auto Discovery type the same monitor password that was typed earlier when the ssmon user was set up on the server or group of servers if you have a domain or a DNS tree Once the server s have been established using Auto Discovery you do not need to type the ssmon password when you log in to Sun StorEdge Configuration Service you automatically have monitoring privileges However whenever you choose a command to perform administration or configuration activities you are prompted with a login dialog box to change your level of security by typing the password for either the ssadmin or ssconfig user t
302. tact Name is empty Contact Phone number format is wrong Continue add drv on logical drive LogicalDrive Continue Media Check on Physical Drive od d Controller Event Battery s s Informational message Controller Event Battery s s Likely battery module error or power cycle of array If error persists replace defective battery module Controller has been reset Controller has been shut down Controllers back in redundancy mode Controllers back in redundancy mode Copy amp Replace has completed on Physical drive d d Copy amp Replace has started from Physical drive d d to d d Copy amp Replace on Physical drive d d has been aborted Create logical drive failure Create logical volume failure Creating Host LUN filter Entry please wait Creating standard Host LUN mapping please wait Customer Fax number format is wrong Customer Name is empty Customer Phone number format is wrong Data is at risk Media performance of this tape is severely degraded Copy any data you require from this tape Do not use this tape again Restart the operation with a different tape Decrypt mail canceled by user Delete logical drive failure Delete logical volume failure Deleted disk successfully Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 289 TABLE G 33 Error Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Deleting disk please wait Deleting Host LUN filter Entry please wait Deleting standard Host
303. tation and generally assumes the status of its servers The following figure shows the group icon expanded to show the subordinate or underlying server objects Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 79 SuntTM StorEdge Configuration Service File View Configuration Array Administration Help 206 235 238 70 StorEdqe 3310 rack_1 EEE ch 0 Id 0 SUN StorEdge 3310 A A Array SN 000032 el secondary SUN StorEdge 3310 N 3323640 e E Logical Drive 1 Partition 0 LUN 0 RAID 0 241338 MB WE Array Ch 0 Id 14 SUN StorEdge 3310 A el Primary SUN StorEdge 3310 SN 3326447 e E Logical Drive 0 Partition 0 LUN 0 RAID 0 172384 MB A group is a new data object that enables multiple servers to be contained under a single category Groups are similar in concept to domains They enable you to organize servers Instead of a linear tree of all the managed servers you can organize the servers into like sets or groups Groups are color coded and symbol coded similarly to servers States with their corresponding colors have the following order of precedence Critical Red the highest Nonresponding Gray Degraded Yellow Optimal Purple Not logged into White A server icon assumes the color of the highest state of any of its storage system Likewise a group icon takes on the highest state of any of its servers with the following exceptions involving non responding or unlogged servers When a group icon is disabled inac
304. ted only on Solaris Create label for the disks finished only on Solaris Media check Controller shutdown 278 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 Error Field Firmware TABLE G 23 Firmware Download Errors Error Field Description 01 Not a SAF TE Device 02 Invalid Data Length 03 Download Failed 04 Check Sum Failed 06 Download OK 07 Invalid firmware file 08 Not enough memory 09 Invalid card ID 0A Controller shutdown failed 0B Inquiry error 0C Invalid Product ID 0D PostDataSet failed OE SendDataSection failed OF FreeResource error 10 Invalid module ID 11 Invalid download data length 12 Download revision failed 13 Invalid device type Error Field System Shutdown TABLE G 24 System Shutdown Errors Error Field Description 01 System Shutdown Failed Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 279 Error Field Set Config TABLE G 25 Set Config Errors Error Field 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Description Set Configuration Thread creation Failed Get Logical Drive List Command Failed Create Config Command Failed Init Completion Status Command Failed Get Configuration Command Failed Change Volume Config Command Failed Delete Logical Drive Command Failed Error Field Controller Event TABLE G 26 Controller Event Errors Error Field 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B OC OD OE Description Controller Reset Controller DRAM Parity Error Redundant Co
305. that the controller be reset so that the changes take effect TABLE 8 2 Change Controller Parameters That Require a Reset Option Tab Controller Unique ID All Channel Mode hannel Change Channel Settings Default Transfer Width Termination Default Sync Clock Write Back Cache ache only in firmware later than 3 31 Optimization SCSI I O Timeout s Drive I F 180 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 TABLE 8 2 Change Controller Parameters That Require a Reset Continued Option Tab Max Queued IO Count Host I F Fibre Connection FC and SATA only LUNs Per Host Controller Configuration Redundancy If a change requires a controller reset the following message is displayed in the lower left side of the window Controller reset is required for changes to take effect To reset the controller and save changed values you can either select the Controller Reset check box at the time of making the change or reset the controller later through the Controller Maintenance window see To Reset the Controller on page 143 If you are making multiple changes you might not want to stop and reset the controller after each change If you do not select the Controller Reset check box and the change requires a reset when you click OK a warning message is displayed Confirmation Dialog A WARNING Changes made to this setting will WOT take effect until the controller is RESET
306. that the write operation is complete before the data is actually written to the disk drive Write back caching improves the performance of write operations and the throughput of the controller card Write back cache is enabled by default Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 185 186 Using write through cache the controller writes the data to the disk drive before signaling the host OS that the process is complete Write through cache has lower write operation and throughput performance than write back cache but it is the safer strategy with minimum risk of data loss on power failure Because a battery module is installed power is supplied to the data cached in memory and the data can be written to disk when power is restored When write back cache is disabled write through cache becomes the default write policy The setting you specify is the default global cache setting for all logical drives You can override this setting per logical drive when you create a logical drive Select an Optimization mode The Optimization mode indicates the amount of data that is written across each drive The controller supports two optimization modes sequential I O and random I O Sequential I O is the default mode The RAID array s cache optimization mode determines the cache block size used by the controller for all logical drives m For sequential optimization the cache block size is 128 Kbyte m For random optimization the cache block si
307. the Traps settings Make sure the same community name is specified as the community name that was indicated in the Security tab earlier If you need to correct the community name type the name in the Community Name field and click Add If another name is already in the entry field it is retained after you type over it To remove a name select it and click Remove Add the IP address of the enterprise management console in the Trap Destinations list a Click Add The Service Configuration window is displayed b Type the IP address in the Entry field and click Add The Traps tab is displayed with the new network address in the Trap Destinations list c Type each IP address in the following format AAA BBB CCC DDD You do not need to type leading zeros An example of an appropriate address is 192 168 100 1 If you want to send optional traps to another enterprise management console type the network address of that management workstation If you have more than one enterprise management console each one needs to have its address indicated here Click OK to confirm your settings Click Close to leave the Network window Exit Microsoft Windows and restart the server If you are planning to install Sun StorEdge Configuration Service you do not have to reboot until after you install the software Appendix E Email and SNMP 255 v To Set Up a Solaris Host For a Solaris host you can generate SNMP version 1 tr
308. the client m Connection List Displays host adapters and array controllers that are installed in or connected to the specified server Note Dual port HBAs are displayed as separate entries because they have separate channels to which devices can be connected m Rescan Sends a command to the selected server to rescan existing inventory and refresh the console Normally each managed server performs a periodic scan of its inventory and updates the console if there is a change If you want to perform a diagnostic of all assigned devices click Rescan selecting this button essentially circumvents the periodic and automatic status updates m Probe Sends a command to the selected server to probe for new inventory for example RAID controllers JBODs and expansion units Whenever a new device has been added or a device name has changed and you want it to be displayed in the main window tree view immediately click Probe Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 85 86 View HBA Card View HBA Card displays the characteristics of the host bus adapter HBA card that is selected in the main Sun StorEdge Configuration Service window It is only displayed when using out of band management To access View HBA Card double click the host adapter icon M in the main Sun StorEdge Configuration Service window or select the HBA icon and select View gt View HBA Card View HBA Card displays the status of the host adapter card and its devic
309. the desired range from the Select SCSI Range list box Note Each channel s ID must be within the same range Click Remove to remove the PID or SID Once your selections have been made click OK to redisplay the previous window Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 183 RS 232 Tab RS 232 parameters enable you to set the baud rate of the RS 232 connection 1 After all channel settings have been made from the Change Controller Parameters window select the RS 232 tab Change Controller Parameters Serer 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Primary SUN StorEdge 3510 SN 8009328 Controller Information Firmware Version 3 31D Boot Record Version 1 31H Serial Number 8009328 CPU Type PPC 50 Controller Name 15 Chars Max Cache Size 1024MB ECC SDRAM Controller Unique ID Hex format O Not Defined 003CE3 Append File ID 331D3 3510 8406F Controller Reset _ Mute Beeper Channel RS 232 I Cache DiskArray Drive I F Host I F f Redundancy Peripheral Network Protocol Port MaxBaudRate Min Baud Rate Default Baud Rate Currentbaud Rate 0 38400 2400 38400 38400 Change Settings OK Cancel Help 2 Select the port desired and click Change Settings The Change RS232 Port Settings window is displayed 3 Select any baud rate desired including the default setting of 38400 and then click OK to return to the previous window Chang
310. the maximum number of LUNs you can configure per host ID Each time a host channel ID is added it uses the number of LUNs allocated in this setting The default setting is 32 LUNs with a predefined range of 1 to 32 LUNs available Note For the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array and the Sun StorEdge 3320 SCSI array the maximum number of LUN assignments is 128 therefore if you use the default setting of 32 you can only add four host channel IDs 4 x 32 128 If you added more than four host channel IDs see Channel Tab on page 182 the LUNs Per Host parameter must be set to a value less than 32 Optional To increase the security of the data stored on the array you can prevent in band management through a SCSI or FC interface by selecting Disable for In Band External Interface Management Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 193 Caution If you are managing the array through in band when you select Disable for In Band External Interface Management communication with the array is disabled If you want to continue monitoring this array select this option only when you are managing the array through out of band For the steps to switch to out of band management see To Use Out of Band Management on page 119 After selecting Disable for In Band External Interface Management select the server icon and choose View View Server Probe It takes several minutes for the console to update 14 If you made changes to t
311. tion 10 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 If Console Locks Up During Use On UNIX systems if the console locks up during use you can stop Sun StorEdge Configuration Service and then close and reopen the window without affecting the agent v To Stop Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 1 At the command prompt type ssconsole stop 2 Run the program again The window is displayed again without affecting the agent Setup Procedures This section contains the following setup procedures which you need to follow before you can configure and monitor an array To Add Servers on page 12 To Delete Servers on page 18 To Log In and Out on page 19 To Assign a Server to Manage a Controller on page 21 To Unassign the Managing Server on page 24 To Configure Agent Parameters on page 24 To Verify Storage Configurations on page 27 To Save the Logical Drive Configuration on page 29 To Create Solaris Host Partitions on page 31 To Create Windows 2000 and Windows 2003 Host Partitions on page 32 To Create IBM AIX Host Logical Volumes on page 33 To Create HP UX Host Logical Volumes on page 34 Chapter 3 Starting and Setting Up Sun StorEdge Configuration Service 11 v To Add Servers You need to assign a server to manage a controller Before you can configure a server you need to add it to the Managed Servers list th
312. tions Management window 24 26 223 configurable parameters 24 operation 81 options management 108 SNMP agent 247 Agent Options Management command 108 Alarm State resetting 96 alarms silencing 96 201 Array Admin Progress command 128 136 138 139 Array Admin Progress window 108 Array Administration Array Admin Progress command 128 136 138 139 menu 139 viewing progress 128 Array Administration Controller Assignment 21 arrays maximum number supported 21 75 107 assign controller through console 21 Assign Server to Manage RAID Controller window 22 auto assign global spare drive 192 Auto Discovery button 14 options 82 process 81 automatic rebuild 136 Available SCSI IDs list box 183 Available Servers list editing 204 B battery expiration information 104 in service date setting 105 status critical 104 degraded 104 beeper muting 144 201 before you begin installing Sun StorEdge Configuration Service procedures 3 browser requirements managing storage through the web 123 313 C cache write back 185 write through 185 Cache tab 185 capacity calculating maximum drive expand capacity 164 expanding capacity of logical drive or logical volume 164 Change Channel Settings window 182 Change Controller Parameters 179 Cache tab Optimization 186 Change Host LUN Assignments 61 Change Settings button 182 Channel Mode list box 182 Clear button configuration 59 cluster co
313. tive it indicates that all the servers attached to that group are not responding if any number less than all of the servers in the group is not responding the group icon appears red representing a critical state For example if there are four servers in the group and three or fewer servers are not responding the group icon is color coded red 80 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 When a group icon is color coded white not logged in it indicates that one or more servers within that group have not yet been fully configured or could represent a period of status transition TABLE 6 2 gives an example of the different color coding of a two server group TABLE 6 2 wo Server Group Colors Server 1 Server 2 Icon Color Icon Color Group Icon Color Gray Gray Gray not responding Gray Yellow Red Purple or White Red critical White White White not logged into White Yellow Yellow degraded White Red Red critical White Purple Purple optimal Red Any Color Red critical Yellow Yellow or Purple Yellow degraded Purple Purple Purple optimal Groups are not required You can configure the program for no groups and fifteen servers for example or for one group with ten servers underneath with an additional five at the top level The program enables any combination The number of groups permitted and the number of servers within a group is limited only by available system memory I
314. to the server icon and you cannot do any configuration and array activity commands on that server until the refresh process is completed and the console main window is updated When the program is running and the server agent and console are connected the agent pings or transmits a periodic signal to the console to verify the server s status If the console does not receive a certain number of consecutive responses handshakes from the agent the console marks the server as offline and disconnects from the server The server s icon is made inactive and adjacently marked with a question mark symbol If a nonactive server was originally made active through the Auto Discovery function the console periodically tries to reestablish server communications Occasionally you might want to have an inventory performed on a server between the periodic status scans To do this double click the server s icon to display the Server View window and then click Rescan in that window Auto Discovery Options If you have selected the Auto Discovery option during the process of adding servers to the Managed Servers list see Select or Deselect Automatic Discovery of servers on page 14 the program automatically scans and performs an inventory on these servers You are not required to provide a monitoring password to retrieve information provided by the program Depending on the complexity of the network and the number of servers it can take sever
315. ton toggles to Identify Drive Off Click Identify Drive Off to change the drive s LED back to green Enclosure Info Tab To access this window either double click the enclosure icon sj in the main window or select the array icon and choose View View Controller Select the Enclosure Info tab Select an enclosure and click View The information in the Enclosure Info tab includes the status of the power supplies fans battery and the enclosure temperature For more information about View Enclosure see View Enclosure on page 95 View FRU For the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array only to display the field replaceable unit identification FRU ID information for the array click View FRU For example FRU ID information see View FRU on page 107 Chapter 6 Monitoring the Array 89 View Controller Parameters Click View Controller Parameters to view detailed information about channels RS 232 cache disk array drive I F host I F redundancy peripheral devices network parameters and supported protocols To view the information click the tab that corresponds to the item you want to view To change controller parameters see To Change Controller Parameters on page 179 RAID Controller Parameters Server 206 6 181 212 techtest Controller Ch O Id 40 SUN StorEdge 3510 A A SN 8009328 Controller Information Firmware Version 411B Boot Record Version 1 31H Serial Number 8009328 CPU Type PPC 50 Controller Narne
316. torEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 TABLE G 33 Error Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Rebuild or check operations have completed Redundant Array State Change Controller Failed Redundant Array State Change Controllers Back in Redundancy Mode Removed a failed primary controller Removed a failed secondary controller Restoring configuration to the controller Retry the configuration operation after the update is complete SAF TE SES card Channel Target firmware has been updated SAF TE SES card Channel Target global status has been updated SAF TE SES card Channel Target slot perform status has been updated SAF TE SES card Channel Target slot status has been updated Save a Copy in server Saving configuration information please wait Scan SCSI drive d d has succeeded Scan SCSI Drive information Scheduled parity check could not be started on logical drive LogicalDrive Scheduled parity check has completed on logical drive LogicalDrive Scheduled parity check has started on logical drive LogicalDrive Scheduled parity check skipped to next schedule due to incompletion of previous check Secondary controller failed Server Error Server failed the operation due to insufficient memory Server Name is empty Server Not managed Set controller parameter s successful Set or add configuration failed Slot Slot has had a device Name SMTP From address format is
317. toring the Array 107 View FRU Server 206 235 238 53 ultras Controller Ch 0 Id 0 SUN StorEdge 3310 A A SN 900000 FRUID Serial Model Description Vendor ID v 370 5403 01 g00001 MN2 LCM 512 02 CTLR Mod 512 Mern Batt LYD Primary Ox FPF PFOA 370 5403 01 900000 MN2 LCM 512 02 CTLR Mod 512 Mem Batt LVD Secondary Ox7F7F7F0 370 5524 01 112233 MN2 RAID LVD BOX RAID LYD Chassis Bkpin Ox F7F7FO1 Z 270 5397 01 334455 MN2 RIOM LVD 02 HostDrv O Mod RAID LVD Ox7F7F7FO1 270 5399 01 223344 MN2 TERM 02 Terminator Mod LYD Ox7F7F7FO1 A P Ox7F7F7F7F g P Ox7F7FTFTF 270 5394 01 556677 MN2 EMU 02 EMU MOD wiSAF TE Left Ox7F7F7F01 MOD wiSAF TF fRidghti Note You can also view the FRUs for a specific controller for the Sun StorEdge 3310 SCSI array by clicking View FRU on the View Controller Configuration window the View Primary Controller Configuration window and the View Secondary Controller Configuration window Array Administration Progress Array Admin Progress displays the progress of new logical drive s initialization This command is accessed by choosing View Array Admin Progress Agent Options Management Agent Options enables you to customize the agent options including polling time periodic device discovery time and SMART monitoring To access Agent Options choose View Agent Options Management For more information see To Configure Agent P
318. troller m Add LDs LVs to the Current Configuration Adds new logical drives logical volumes to an existing configuration This command does not erase the other configured logical drives on the controller m Dynamically Grow and or Reconfigure LDs LVs Enables you to expand the capacity of logical drives and logical volumes add drives to existing logical drives and logical volumes and copy and replace all member drives with drives of higher capacity m Make or Change Standby Drives Adds one or more new standby drives to be associated with the array controller m Change Host LUN Assignments Enables you to assign logical drives logical volumes and partitions to a host channel Chapter 4 Full Configuration 45 a Change Controller Parameters Enables you to modify the controller parameters m Manage Existing LDs LVs and Partitions Enables you to delete individual logical drives and logical volumes and create delete partitions from existing logical drives and logical volumes m Configure Web Server Sun StorEdge Enterprise Storage Manager Topology Reporter software required Enables you to configure a web server so you can manage monitor an array through a web browser In this chapter the New Configuration option is described in detail Configure Web Server is described in Managing Storage Through the Web on page 123 The remaining options are described in Updating the Configuration on page 149 The
319. ture 28 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 7 If the array is already configured and the configuration meets your needs continue with the next section If you would like to change the configuration see Full Configuration on page 37 v To Save the Logical Drive Configuration Even though logical drive configuration information is stored on controllers and on the physical drives attached to them extreme circumstances such as fire can occur causing damage to both the controller and the drives Keep multiple backup copies of your current logical drive configuration on some form of external media other than the array Keep at least one backup copy in a vault or secured location off site A backup copy of the configuration enables you to restore the configuration to a new controller without having to completely reconfigure the array If you do not have a backup copy of the current configuration data could be lost The saved configuration includes controller parameter settings and LUN mapping Always save your controller configuration to a file whenever you m Install a new storage system enclosure or change the SCSI ID for the controller in an existing enclosure m Replace a controller m Reconfigure or add logical drives to a controller m Rebuild the data from a failed drive to a standby drive To restore a configuration from a file see To Restore a Logical Drive Configuration on
320. two servers each with a PCI bus and a boot disk that is not a part of the shared SCSI storage b Install a host adapter card such as Ultra Wide differential host adapter in each server and set a unique SI ID for each host adapter on the shared SCSI bus c Install two network adapter cards on each server d Install the latest Windows updates on the boot disk of each server 2 Install the dual active active storage subsystem and connect it to both host adapters Refer to the supplied documentation for installation steps 3 Install the agent on each server a Stop the services on one server before installing it on the other server 234 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 b Ensure that the service is running on a server that has access to a host LUN mapped on logical drive assigned to primary controller c See the appropriate installation chapter for specific steps for installing the agent After installing the agent you do not need to reboot However once the agent is installed be sure to stop the services on one of the servers Note In the next few steps you will work with one server only as an example Install the console software You can install the console on one of the servers or on any computer on the network where the servers reside The program enables you to configure and monitor the array remotely See the appropriate installation chapter for detailed steps
321. ublic provides more security because it limits the communication to only those computers that have the specified community string 1 For Windows 2000 choose Start Programs Administrative Tools Services For Windows 2003 choose Start All Programs Administrative Tools Services 2 Double click SNMP Service and then click Properties 3 The Microsoft SNMP Properties window is displayed For Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 if you do not have the SNMP service installed a Choose Start Control Panel Add or Remove Programs Appendix E Email and SNMP 253 b Select Add Remove Windows Components c Select Management and Monitoring Tools and click Details d Select Simple Network Management Protocol and click OK e Click Next f Choose Start Control Panel Network Connections g Select Local Connection h Select Properties Note You might need to insert the Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 CD to enable the computer to copy the necessary files for the SNMP service 4 Click the Security tab in the Microsoft SNMP Properties window to display the Security settings 5 Make sure that the community name or community string that you want to use for the server is specified in the Accepted community names list If the community name is not already on the list click Add to display the SNMP Service Configuration window Type the new name in the Community Name field specify the rights in the Community
322. uidelines For detailed information read about creating logical volumes in your HP UX OS manual 1 Determine that the drives are being recognized by the host by typing ioscan fnC disk 2 Start a System Administration Manager sam session 3 Choose Disks and File Systems gt Volume Groups 4 From the Actions menu at the top of the window click Create 5 In the Create New Volume Group Name window click Select New Volume Group Name type a name for the New Volume Group and click OK 6 In the Create New Volume Group window click Select Disk s select the drive s that are going to be in the Volume Group and click OK 7 In the Create New Volume Group window click Define New Logical Volume s a In the LV name field type a name for the logical volume b Using the value displayed in the Approx Free Mbytes field which specifies Mbytes left in the volume group determine the size of the new logical volume Although you can create multiple logical volumes you must create at least one If you are creating one logical volume with the full capacity of the volume group type the number displayed in the Approx Free Mbytes field If you are creating multiple logical volumes specify the size of each and type the size of the first logical volume c In the Mount Directory field type the directory where you want to mount the logical volume and click Add d To add more logical volumes repeat Steps a c e When you have f
323. urations the parity checking procedure on a logical drive recalculates the parity of data stripes in each of the logical drive s RAID stripe sets and compares it with the stored parity For RAID 1 configurations if an inconsistency is encountered data is copied from the master disk to the slave disk If a bad block is encountered the data is copied from the other disk master or slave to the reporting disk drive reallocating the bad block Caution If an array s data parity is seriously damaged restoring data by regenerating might cause data loss Only select Regenerate after you have performed any necessary data recovery based on the parity check errors Note If you select Regenerate make sure that Generate Error Event is also selected so that if inconsistent parity is encountered bad blocks are specified Chapter 7 Maintaining the Array 129 Generate Error Event default When a parity check is run and a discrepancy is found an error is reported which enables you to analyze the error and check the integrity of your data before overwriting the parity drive 5 Click the Parity Check button to start the parity check process Once a parity check has started the Progress Indicator is automatically displayed If this window is closed it can be reopened by choosing View gt Array Admin Progress or by clicking the Progress Indicator icon A window is displayed that shows the percentage of completion progress for each array
324. urn to the main window select the correct server or controller from the tree view and repeat Steps 2 and 3 Select a drive to be assigned or changed Change or assign the drive s state by selecting Ready Global StandBy or StandBy for LD local Click Modify Click Apply and then click Close Whenever you make changes to the configuration save the new configuration to a file For details see Configuration File on page 62 Chapter 8 Updating the Configuration 203 Available Servers Occasionally you might need to edit or delete an entry from the Available or Managed Servers lists in the Server List Setup window v To Edit a Server Entry 1 Choose File Server List Setup The Server Setup window is displayed If necessary move the server name from the Managed Servers list to the Available Servers list in the Server List Setup window Note that only the server entries in the Available Servers list can be edited Available Servers Managed Servers 206 656 181 121 Tech Remove All lt lt 204 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 2 Select the name of the server in the Available Servers list and click Edit The Edit Server window is displayed l Edit Server Sener name techtest Properties Mailing Lists Grouping Metwork Information IP Address 206 686 101 212 socke
325. us adapter HBA typically sees twice the number of logical drives when viewed through a hub Each Fibre Channel device is assigned a unique identifier called a worldwide name WWN A WWN is assigned by the IEEE and is similar to a MAC address in IP or a URL on the Internet These WWNs stay with the device for its lifetime LUN filtering uses this WWN to specify which server is to have exclusive use of a specific logical drive From the main menu of the console an easy drag and drop method is used to map each logical drive to a host s Fibre Channel HBA card identified with a WWN In the following example when you map logical drive LUN 01 to host channel 0 and select WWN1 server A has a proprietary path to that logical drive With LUN filtering the logical drive is visible and accessible to only the HBA device on the host but not to any other HBA device All three servers continue to see and access LUN 02 and LUN 03 unless filters are assigned to them Server A Server B Server C WWN1 WWN2 WWN3 LUN 01 LUN 02 LUN 03 FIGURE 5 1 Example of LUN Filtering An advantage of LUN filtering is that it enables many more hosts with multiple OSs to attach to an array through a common Fibre Channel port and still maintain LUN security 66 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 Users Guide March 2007 Assigning a LUN Filter Assigning a LUN filter involves the following steps Accessing the LUN Filter View Adding a new
326. vice 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 Maximum Number of Supported Logical Drives Logical Partitions and LUN Assignments 38 v To Use Standard Configuration 39 Media Scan 44 v To Use Custom Configuration 44 The New Configuration Option 46 Before You Use New Configuration 46 v To Prepare for Logical Drives Larger Than 253 Gbyte 49 v ToCreate and Partition a Logical Drive Using New Configuration 49 v To Create and Partition a Logical Volume 57 Media Scan 59 v To Clear a Configuration 59 v To Log Out of the Configuration Level 60 Host LUN Assignments 60 v To Add or Change Map a Host LUN 61 v To Delete Unmap a Host LUN 62 Configuration File 62 v To Save a Configuration to a Backup File 63 Loading the Configuration 64 LUN Filtering FC and SATA Only 65 Overview 65 Assigning a LUN Filter 67 v To Access the LUN Filter View 67 To Add a New Host Manually 67 To Add an HBA Device Manually 69 To Remove Standard Host Mapping 71 To Assign a LUN Filter 72 To Delete a LUN Filter 74 a a lt Contents v 6 Monitoring the Array 75 The Main Window 76 Device Status 77 Degraded State 78 Critical State 78 Device Capacities 79 Online Help 79 Tree View of Product Configurations 79 Groups 79 The Monitoring Process 81 Auto Discovery Options 82 Viewing Detailed Device Information 83 View Group 83 View Server 84 View HBA Card 86 View Controller 87 Controllers Tab 88 Physical Drives Tab 88 Enclosure Info Tab 89 View FRU 89
327. volumes for which you want to delete the partitions 2 View the logical drives or logical volumes for which you want to delete the partitions If any of the partitions on the drive have host LUN mappings proceed to Step 3 if they do not proceed to Step 7 3 Choose Configuration Custom Configure 4 Select Change Host LUN Assignments 5 Select the LUNs that are mapped to the logical drive s or logical volume s partitions that you want to delete and click Unmap Host LUN 6 Click OK and then click Close 7 Choose Configuration Custom Configure 8 Select Manage Existing LDs LVs and Partitions from the Custom Configuration Options window 9 Select the Partitions tab 10 Select a partition to modify or delete by starting from the last partition within the logical drive or logical volume 162 Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2 4 User s Guide March 2007 11 Click Delete and then click OK Manage Existing LDs L Vs and Partitions Server 206 235 238 652 B52 Controller Primary SUM StorEdge 3310 SN 5BE LOsiLvs Partitions Partition 100 MB Partition Size 134354 mB 100 MB Enter partition size a number to 100 ME create multiple partitions of the same 50 MB size Example 1000 32 100 MB 134354 ME 137904 ME a eee J e 12 Click OK in the Confirm Configuration Operation window to complete the operation and click Close 13 HP UX OS only To ensure that the
328. y again later Appendix G Error Codes and Messages 291 TABLE G 33 Error Status Messages Continued Error and Status Messages Inserted failed primary controller Inserted failed secondary controller Invalid data received Invalid server IP address IOM SES Firmware Revision Level Mismatch LogChl d Id d ses version s s pld version s s CHASSIS BKPLN SN s IP Address format error must be xxx xxx xxx xxx and 0 amp amp lt xxx amp amp lt 255 IP Address is duplicated IP Address is empty Location is empty Log in as ssconfig user and try the operation again Logical array LogicalArray has changed from a state state to a state state Logical Drive ID d exceeds 2 TB size limitation for sequential optimized LD Logical Drive ID d exceeds 512 GB size limitation for random optimized LD Logical Drive ID d Rebuild Aborted Informational message Logical Drive ID LogicalDrive rebuild has aborted Logical Drive ID LogicalDrive rebuild has completed Logical Drive ID LogicalDrive rebuild has started Logical Drive LogicalDrive has changed from a State state to a State state Logical Drive LogicalDrive has changed from a State state to a State state Logical Volume Components List Total disks in this Logical Volume Login successful Login unsuccessful Logout command error Mail information is empty Media Check has completed on Physical drive od d Media Check has started on Physical drive od d Me
329. you must first unmap and delete logical drives so you can create new logical drives that support redundancy 2 Determine whether the optimization mode of the logical drive is to be Sequential I O default or Random I O The optimization mode you select determines the maximum number of disks you can include in an array and the maximum usable capacity of a logical drive total array capacity and cache block size Optimization is set in the Cache tab of the Change Controller Parameters window and is set to Sequential by default For more information on Sequential I O and Random I O and for steps on how to change the optimization mode see Cache Tab on page 185 3 Determine the total number of physical disks to be included in the logical drive which is dependent on the optimization mode selected If the security of your data is important leave remaining disks for standby drives For information on the maximum number of disks and maximum usable capacity per logical drive for random and sequential optimization see Maximum Number of Disks and Maximum Usable Capacity for Random and Sequential Optimization on page 187 Note If the logical drive is going to be larger than 253 Gbyte see To Prepare for Logical Drives Larger Than 253 Gbyte on page 49 4 Determine whether any standby spare drives are to be local or global A standby drive is a drive that is marked as a spare to support automatic data rebuilding afte
330. ze is 32 Kbyte An appropriate cache block size improves performance when a particular application uses either large or small stripe sizes m Video playback multimedia post production audio and video editing and similar applications read and write large files in sequential order m Transaction based and database update applications read and write small files in random order Since the cache block size works in conjunction with the default stripe size set by the cache optimization mode for each logical drive you create these default stripe sizes are consistent with the cache block size setting You can however specify a different stripe size for any logical drive at the time you create it See Specifying Non Default Stripe Sizes on page 187 for more information Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family RAID Firmware User s Guide for more information on cache optimization modes Note Once logical drives are created you cannot use the RAID firmware s Optimization for Random I O or Optimization for Sequential I O menu option to change the optimization mode without deleting all logical drives You can use Sun StorEdge Configuration Service as described above or the Sun StorEdge CLI set cache parameters command to change the optimization mode while logical drives exist Refer to the Sun StorEdge 3000 Family CLI User s Guide for information on the set cache parameters command Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration

Sun StorEdge 3000 Family Configuration Service 2.4 User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents